Home

2002 GMC Jimmy Owner`s Manual

1. The belt is buckled in the wrong place 1 19 Q What s wrong with this The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 20 You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which aren t as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you wouldn t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer to fix it 4 3 A i as D SGIAN i J The belt is twisted across the body 1 21 To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don t wear safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible
2. 0 190 at 4 400 rpm Thermostat Specification 195 F 91 C Spark Plug Gap 0 060 inches 1 52 mm Wheels and Tires Wheel Nut Torque 100 Ib ft 140 N m Tire Pressure See the Certification Tire label See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index 6 71 Capacities Please refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for more information Cooling System Automatic Trans 11 7 quarts 11 1 L Manual Trans 11 9 quarts 11 3 L Engine Oil with Filter 4 5 quarts 4 3 L Automatic Transmission Drain and Refill 5 0 quarts 4 7 L Differential Fluid IRE AL ic a dnkun bre beats aeverhee bre ek 4 0 pints 1 9 L Front 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 6 pints 1 2 L Fuel Tank 2 Door Models 19 0 U S gallons 72 0 L Fuel Tank 4 Door Models 18 0 U S gallons 68 0 L All capacities are approximate After refill the level must be checked 6 72 Air Conditioning Refrigerant Capacity If you do your own service work you ll need the proper service manual See Doing Your Own Service Work in the Index for additional information It is recommended that service work on your air conditioning system be performed by a qualified technician Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a 1 8 Ibs 79 kg Use Refrigerant Oil R134a Systems Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replaceme
3. 2002 GMC Jimmy Owner s Manual Litho in U S A Copyright General Motors Corporation 06 28 01 Part Number X2211 A First Edition All Rights Reserved GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem GMC the GMC Truck Emblem and the name JIMMY are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes after that time without further notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for GMC whenever it appears in this manual Please keep this manual in your vehicle so it will be there if you ever need it when you re on the road If you sell the vehicle please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it ii CERTIFIED WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH National Institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE XN 7 We support voluntary technician certification For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a French Language Manual Aux propri taires canadiens Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en fran ais chez votre concessionaire ou au Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 How to Use this Manual Many people read their owner s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If you do this it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle I
4. 21 000 Miles 35 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 7 12 Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 24 000 Miles 40 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 27 000 Miles 45 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis
5. Model Reference This manual covers these models 2 Door Utility 4 Door Utility se eee Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Here you ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts 1 2 Seats and Seat Controls 1 36 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children 1 10 Safety Belts They re for Everyone and Small Adults 4 Door Models 1 15 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About 1 38 Center Rear Passenger Position Safety Belts and the Answers 4 Door Models 1 16 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 40 Children 1 16 Driver Position 1 43 Restraint Systems for Children 1 22 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 55 Older Children 1 23 Right Front Passenger Position 1 58 Safety Belt Extender 1 23 Air Bag System 1 58 Checking Your Restraint Systems 1 31 Center Front Passenger Position Four Door 1 59 Replacing Restraint System Parts After Models with Front Bench Seat a Crash 1 32 Rear Seat Passengers Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the seats how to adjust them and fold them up and down Manual Front Seat You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you don t want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehi
6. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the socket Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps into place Reinstall the harness bulb socket with the new bulb into the headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight To reinstall the assembly snap the outboard end of the lamp assembly back into the vehicle Then swing the assembly in and snap it into place Install the two retaining clips Close the hood 6 41 Taillamps 1 Open the endgate 2 Remove the two screws 3 Pull the assembly away from the vehicle 4 Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it Push the tab in while you turn the socket counterclockwise 5 Holding the base of the bulb pull the bulb straight out of the socket 6 Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it clicks 6 42 from the lamp assembly 8 9 Put the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise until it locks in place Install the lamp assembly and tighten the screws Close the endgate Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear or cracking See Windshield Wiper Blade Check in the Index for more information See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts in the Index for the proper type of replacement blade 1 NOTICE Use care when removing or installing a blade assembly Accidental bumping can cause the arm t
7. TRLTRN LTTRN TRR TRN RTTRN TRL B U VEH B U BAT 2 INT ABS IGN RAP IGN STUD OL B A SPARE FUSES BTSI PARKLP HVAC HAZLP STARTER TACHMSU IVECHMSU RR PRK LIFT GLASS MIRILKS ECMI LDLEV ENG OXYSEN AR DEFOG come gypume Buu ave urPRK RRDFoG HTOMIR ATC RTTURN TRLPRK HDLP Pwr LLTHOLP DRL RTHDLP FOG LP TBC ae i AIC FOG LP CRANK LT TURN FRPRK HDL Pw WAV PMP IGN HORN CHMSL HORN IHTDSEAT STOPLP RR WAV C PRINTED IN USA Name Usage TRL TRN Trailer Left Turn TRR TRN Trailer Right Turn TRL B U Trailer Back Up Lamps VEH B U Vehicle Back Up Lamps Name RT TURN LT TURN HDLP W W LT TRN RT TRN RR PRK TRL PRK LTHDLP RTHDLP FRPRK INT BAT ENG I ECM B ABS ECMI Usage Right Turn Signal Front Left Turn Signal Front Not Used Left Turn Signal Rear Right Turn Signal Rear Right Rear Parking Lamps Trailer Park Lamps Left Headlamp Right Headlamp Front Parking Lamps I P Fuse Block Feed Engine Sensors Solenoids MAF CAM PURGE VENT Engine Control Module Fuel Pump Module Oil Pressure Anti Lock Brake S
8. Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 36 000 Miles 60 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service MILEAGE g Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first ooo i See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 7 15 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 39 000 Miles 65 000 km a ooo Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 42 000 Miles 70 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first
9. Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you re there Use your headlamps even during the day They make you more visible to oncoming traffic Driving to the top crest of a hill at full speed can cause an accident There could be a drop off embankment cliff or even another vehicle You could be seriously injured or killed As you near the top of a hill slow down and stay alert 4 21 Q What should I do if my vehicle stalls or is about to stall and I can t make it up the hill If this happens there are some things you should do and there are some things you must not do First here s what you should do Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards Also apply the parking brake If your engine is still running shift the transmission to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE R If your engine has stopped running you ll need to restart it With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to PARK P or shift to neutral if your vehicle has a manual transmission and restart the engine Then shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill as straight
10. NOTICE Your vehicle doesn t need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t drive at any one speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t make full throttle starts Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings aren t yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Don t tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer in the Index for more information 2 20 Ignition Positions With the key in the ignition you can turn it to five different positions A ACCESSORY This position lets you use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off Push in the key and turn it toward you Your steering wheel will remain locked just as it was before you inserted the key NOTICE Don t operate accessories in the ACCESSORY position for long periods of time Prolonged operation of accessories in the ACCESSORY position could drain your battery and prevent you from starting your vehicle On manual transmission vehicles turning the key to LOCK will lock the steering column and result in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle This could caus
11. 5 16 4 Then fill the coolant recovery tank to ADD mark 5 Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank but leave the radiator pressure cap off 6 Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fan 7 By this time the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck 8 Then replace the pressure cap At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck reinstall the pressure cap Be sure the arrow on the pressure cap lines up like this Engine Fan Noise This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan When the clutch is engaged the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine In most everyday driving conditions the clutch is not engaged This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures the fan speed increases when the clutch engages So you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts It is merely the cooling system functioning properly The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages You may also hear this fan noise when you start the e
12. 7 Return the jack wheel wrench and wheel blocks to the proper location in your vehicle s rear area Secure the items and replace the jack cover Use the following diagram as a guide w gt mmo Retainer Rubber Band Some Models Work Gloves Mat Jack Storage Cover Wheel Blocks G Hub Cap Removal Tool Some Models H Wheel Wrench I Jack J Jacking Instructions 5 33 Spare Tire Your vehicle when new had a fully inflated spare tire A spare tire whether compact size or full size may lose air over time so check its inflation pressure regularly See Inflation Tire Pressure and Loading Your Vehicle in the Index for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle For instruction on how to remove install or store a spare tire see Changing a Flat Tire in the Index After installing the spare tire on your vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is correctly inflated Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed back onto your vehicle This way a spare tire will be available in case you need it again Don t mix tires and wheels of different sizes because they won t fit Keep your spare tire and its wheel together If your vehicle has the Xtreme Sport Appearance Package RPO V4A the spare tire is smaller than your vehicle s original road tires so don t inclu
13. 7 8 Lubricate the front suspension ball joints steering linkage parking brake cable guides propshaft splines universal joints and brake pedal springs A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule Drive axle service See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for proper lubricant to use Check fluid level and add fluid as needed If driving in dusty areas or when towing a trailer drain fluid and refill every 15 000 miles 25 000 km If your vehicle has a locking differential drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change More frequent lubrication may be required for heavy duty or off road use Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 3 000 Miles 5 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 6 000 Miles 10 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and R
14. 9 Install the two retaining clips 10 Close the hood 1 Open the hood 2 Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up 3 Pull the headlamp assembly out eo we ND Turn the bulb socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it Put the new bulb socket assembly into the headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight Plug in the electrical connector Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle Install the two retaining clips Close the hood One Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps Two Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps 1 Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under _ 1 Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under One Piece Composite Headlamp System earlier in Two Piece Composite Headlamp System earlier in this section this section 2 Twist the bulb socket to remove it from the headlamp assembly 2 Locate the locking tabs on the assembly Squeeze the tabs together and push that end of the assembly out while holding the tabs The assembly will swing out 3 Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the socket 3 Unplug the electrical connector 4 Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps into place 5 Put the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight 6 Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle 7 Install the two retaining clips 8 Close the hood 6 40 Turn the harness bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
15. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 23 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 7 24 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 78 000 Miles 130 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as
16. press the knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob for two seconds The radio will produce one beep AM FM Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The CD will stop but remain in the player TAPE CD Press this button to play a tape when listening to the radio Press this button to switch between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening EJT Eject Press this button to stop a CD when it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio off CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first Compact Disc Messages If the disc comes out it could be for one of the following reasons If you re driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smooth the disc should play Ifit s very hot When the temperature returns to normal the disc should play The disc is upside down It is dirty scratched or wet The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again Ifthe CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected contact your dealer AM FM Stereo with Six Disc Compact Disc Player with Programmable Equalization and Radio Data System RDS If Equipped 3 51 Playing the Radio PWR P
17. Also see Wiper Blades Cleaning in the Index Spare Tire Check At least twice a year after the monthly inflation check of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to the correct tire inflation pressure make sure that the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable See Storing the Spare Tire and Tools in the Index Weatherstrip Lubrication Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 7 45 Manual Transmission Check Check the transmission fluid level add if needed See Manual Transmission Fluid in the Index Check for leaks A fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss Have the system inspected and repaired if needed Automatic Transmission Check Check the transmission fluid level add if needed See Automatic Transmission Fluid in the Index A fluid loss may indicate a problem Check the system and repair if needed Hydraulic Clutch System Check Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir See Hydraulic Clutch Fluid in the Index A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired at once 7 46 At Least Once a
18. Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced Care of Your Remote Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants direct sunlight and extreme heat If they aren t they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player Your remote tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use Your radio may display CLN to indicate that you have used your remote cassette tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer If this message appears on the display your remote cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player The recommended cleaning method for your remote cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealer GM Part No 12344789 3 77 When cleaning the cassette tape player with the recommended non abrasive cleaning cassette it is possible that the cassette may eject because the cut tape detection feature on your radio
19. If you use the optional engine coolant heater before starting your engine your heating system will produce warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartment in cold weather See Engine Coolant Heater in the Index Defogging and Defrosting On cool humid days use blend mode to keep the windshield and side windows clear Use defrost mode to remove fog or ice from the windshield quickly in extreme humid or cold conditions Turn the temperature knob clockwise and move the fan knob toward high Rear Window Defogger If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature the rear window will have lines that warm the glass For best results clear the window of as much snow or ice as possible before using the rear window defogger To turn on the rear window defogger find the button marked REAR with the defog symbol on the lower right corner of your climate control system Press the button until the light in the button comes on then release it It will only work if the ignition switch is turned to RUN Pressing the REAR button on your climate control system will also activate your heated outside mirrors if equipped This will help to keep ice and snow from collecting on your mirror surfaces The rear window defogger will stay on for five to seven minutes then turn off If you need additional warming time turn it on again You can turn the defogger off at any time by pressing the button Do not attach a temporary ve
20. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette 4 Within five seconds press and hold the REV and FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds The tape symbol will flash on the display showing that the cut tape detection feature is no longer active 5 Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer s recommended cleaning time If your vehicle is equipped with the AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control or the AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player Bose do the following 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds 4 Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette 5 Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer s recommended cleaning time When the cleaning cassette has been ejected the broken tape detection feature is active again You may also choose a non scrubbing action wet type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own A non scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner The use of a non scrubbing action dry type cleaning cassette is not recommended After you clean the player press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset
21. Reduce the frequency of shifts when pulling a heavy trailer provide the same shift feel when pulling a heavy trailer as when the vehicle is unloaded and reduce the need to change throttle position when pulling a heavy trailer This feature is turned on or off by pressing a button on the floor console or the shift knob When the feature is on a light located on the instrument panel cluster will illuminate to indicate that the tow haul mode has been selected See Tow Haul Mode Light in the Index The tow haul mode is automatically turned off each time the vehicle is started 4 52 The tow haul mode is most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 of the Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The tow haul mode for hauling a heavy trailer is most useful under the following conditions When driving through hilly terrain at speeds below 55 mph 88 km h when driving in low speed or stop and go traffic below 55 mph 88 km h and when driving in parking lots Operating in the tow haul mode when not pulling a heavy trailer will not cause damage to the vehicle but you may experience reduced fuel economy and undesirable performance from the engine and transmission The tow haul mode should be used only when pulling a heavy trailer Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades
22. Safety belts are for everyone 1 15 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see the part of this manual called Children Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has We ll start with the driver position Driver Position This part describes the driver s restraint system Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here s how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 1 16 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 To make the lap part
23. This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle Infants and Young Children Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by the appropriate restraint Young children should not use the vehicle s safety belts unless there is no other choice People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle A baby doesn t weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it CAUTION Continued 1 40 HHAARAAN AAAAa9 o92d a p gt For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 Ib 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on a person s arms A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint Children who are up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer outstanding protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide
24. You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You ll have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful What s the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it s about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution Accelerate gently Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle s stabil
25. below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it s more likely that the fetus won t be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger s safety belt properly see Driver Position earlier in this section The right front passenger s safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety belt except for one thing If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way you will engage the child restraint locking feature If this happens just let the belt go back all the way and start again Air Bag System This part explains the air bag system Your vehicle has air bags one air bag for the driver and another air bag for the right front passenger Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating air bag But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren t wearing your safety belt even if you have air bags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it
26. for more than four seconds the radio will change to preset scan mode The sound will mute while scanning To scan preset stations press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than four seconds PRESET SCAN will appear on the display You will hear a double beep The radio will go to a preset station stored on your pushbuttons play for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets The sound will mute while scanning Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select AM FM1 or FM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization that best suits the type of station selected 5 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone Bass Treble AUDIO Push the AUDIO knob until BASS MID or TREB appears on the display Turn the knob to increase or decrease When you use this knob the radio s tone setting will switch to custom If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble To ad
27. lighter and the heating element Sun Visors To block out glare you can pull the visor down You can also swing the visor from side to side Visor Vanity Mirror Pull the sun visor down and lift the cover to expose the vanity mirror Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror If Equipped Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn on the lamps Accessory Power Outlets With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio There are two accessory power outlets located near the center of the vehicle on the lower part of the instrument panel There may also be additional accessory power outlets located behind the front storage area for rear seat passengers A small cap must be pulled down to access an accessory power outlet When not using an outlet be sure to cover it with the protective cap NOTICE When using accessory power outlets Maximum load of any electrical equipment should not exceed 20 amps Be sure to turn off any electrical equipment when not in use Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods can drain the battery 2 75 Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible When adding electrical equipment be sure to follow the with the accessory power outlet and could result in proper installation instructions included with the blown vehicle or adapter fuses If you experience a equipment problem see your dealer fo
28. outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important And it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle The following chart shows how much your trailer can weigh based upon your vehicle model and options Axle Ratio Max Trailer Wt Vehicle Two Wheel Drive Two Door Auto Trans Two Wheel Drive Two Door Xtreme Blazer Anto TAN Ss weds ned betaeed Sack Sse ae aed PRR NE Two Wheel Drive Two Door Manual Trans Two Wheel Drive Two Door Xtreme Blazer Manual Trans 0 000 cece eee Two Wheel Drive Four Door Auto Trans Four Wheel Drive Two Door Auto Trans 3 42 3 42 3 42 3 42 3 42 3 42 3 73 5 700 Ibs 2 587 kg 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 4 200 Ibs 1 906 kg 2 000 Ibs 908 kg 5 500 Ibs 2 497 kg 5 400 Ibs 2 451 kg 5 400 Ibs 2 451 kg GCWR 9 500 Ibs 4 313 kg 6 500 Ibs 2 951 kg 8 000 Ibs 3 632 kg 6 500 Ibs 2 951 kg 9 500 Ibs 4 313 kg 9 500 Ibs 4 313 kg 9 500 Ibs 4 313 kg 4 53 Vehicle Axle Ratio Max Trailer Wt GCWR Four Wheel Drive Two Door Manual Trans 3 42 3 900 Ibs 1 770 kg 8 000 Ibs 3 632 kg ZR2 occ cccccccecuscccusccccuacecees 3 73 4 600 lbs 2 087 kg 9 000 Ibs 4 086 kg Auto Trans Manual Trans 3 73 4 100 Ibs 1 860 kg 8 000 Ibs 3 632 kg Four Wheel Drive Four Door Auto Trans 3 42 5 100 Ibs 2 313 kg 9 500 Ibs
29. transmission and the engine running The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving or 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI button You must wait for the 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear If the 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI button is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N or with the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with manual transmission Shifting to NEUTRAL To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL first make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll 1 Set the parking brake AA U N 10 Start the vehicle Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle Put the transmission in NEUTRAL N or have the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with manual transmission Shift the transfer case to 2HI Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LO buttons for 10 seconds The NEUTRAL light will come on when the transfer case shift to NEUTRAL is complete Shift the transmission to REVERSE R for one second then shift the transmission to DRIVE D for one second or FIRST 1 for vehicles with manual transmission Turn the ignition to OFF Place the transmission s
30. 1 41 Q What are the different types of add on A child restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs 1 42 Newborn infants need complete support including support for the head and neck This is necessary because a newborn infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing seat settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or old
31. Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL Balance Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Compact Disc Insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in Wait a few seconds and the disc should play CD and a CD symbol will also appear on the display Anytime you are playing a CD the letters CD will be next to the CD symbol If an error appears on the display see Compact Disc Messages later in this section 1 PREV Previous Press this pushbutton to search for the previous track If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once the disc will advance further Sound is muted in this mode 3 39 2 RDM Random Press this pushbutton to play the tracks on the disc in random order RANDOM will appear on the display Press this pushbutton again to return to normal play 3 NEXT Press this pushbutton to search for the next track If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once the disc will advance f
32. Air bags are designed to work with safety belts but don t replace them Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something They aren t designed to inflate at all in rollover rear or low speed frontal crashes or in many side crashes And for some unrestrained occupants air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there s an air bag for that person 1 23 Air bags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye If you re too close to an inflating air bag as you would be if you were leaning forward it could seriously injure you Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with air bags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle 1 24 Anyone who is up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see th
33. Automatic Crankcase Ventilation PCV Valve Inspection Transmission Service severe conditions only Every 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Cooling System Every 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Fuel Filter Service or every 60 months whichever occurs first Replacement Engine Air Cleaner Filter Replacement i These intervals only summarize maintenance services Every 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Automatic Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance Transmission Service normal conditions Automatic on the following pages Transfer Case Only Transfer Case Fluid Change 7 7 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be repeated after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals for the life of this vehicle The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be repeated at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km for the life of this vehicle See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following Footnotes The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded
34. In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt have a qualified technician do the work If you want to get the service information see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Part B Owner Checks and Services tells you what should be checked and when It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections explains important inspections that your dealer s service department or another qualified service center should perform Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants lists some recommended products necessary to help keep your vehicle properly maintained These products or their equivalents should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done Part E Maintenance Record is a place for you to record and keep track of the maintenance performed on your vehicle Keep your maintenance receipts They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we don t know exactly how you ll drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you may drive long distances all the time i
35. Included with this audio system are six Bose speakers and a six channel Bose amplifier Please see your dealer for details Playing the Radio PWR Power Press this knob to turn the system on and off VOL Volume Turn this knob clockwise to increase volume Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume The knob is capable of being turned continuously MUTE Press this button to silence the system Press it again to turn on the sound RECALL Press this button to display the station being played or to display the clock Clock display is available with the ignition turned off SCV Speed Compensated Volume With SCV your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Then as you drive SCV automatically increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use SCV turn the control ring counterclockwise Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display will show your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it lt SEEK D Pre
36. Index The driver s door has a switch for the passengers windows as well Press the side of the switch with the down arrow to lower a window Press the side of the switch with the up arrow to raise the window Express Down Window The driver s window has an express down feature that allows you to lower it without holding the window switch Press the down arrow on the switch marked AUTO located on the driver s door briefly to activate the express down feature Lightly tap the switch to open the window slightly The express down feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the up arrow end of the switch Lockout Switch Four door vehicles have a lockout feature to prevent passengers from operating the power windows It is located on the driver s door armrest Press LOCK to activate this feature Press NORM and the windows will return to normal operation Swing Out Windows Two Door Only If your vehicle has rear swing out windows unlatch them at the clasps and push out on the glass to open them When you close the window be sure the latch catches Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons A child or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move Don t leave the keys in a vehicle with children This vehicle has one double sided key for the ignition endgate
37. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise Lower the jack completely 5 28 Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 lb ft 140 N m NOTICE Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification 5 29 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place NOTICE An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should always be stored under the vehicle with the hoist However storing it that way for an extended period could damage the wheel To avoid this have the wheel repaired as soon as possible 5 30 Retainer Valve Stem Pointed Down Spare or Flat Tire Spring Follow this diagram to store the underbody mounted spare E Wheel Wrench F Lower G Raise H Hoist Arm Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the
38. Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from headlamps behind you A photocell on the back of the mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside Another photocell built into the mirror surface senses when headlamps are behind you At night when the glare is too high the mirror will gradually darken to reduce glare this change may take a few seconds The mirror will return to its clear daytime state when the glare is reduced The mirror will also return to its clear daytime state when the vehicle is put into REVERSE R Press the AUTO button at the base of the mirror to turn on the automatic feature The button has an indicator light to show it is on Press the OFF button to turn the automatic feature off 2 61 Time Delay The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which prevents unnecessary switching from the night back to the day position This delay prevents rapid changing of the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic Cleaning the Photocells Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the photocells when necessary Outside Manual Adjust Mirror Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side of your vehicle You can fold them before entering a car wash Pull the mirrors in toward the vehicle Push the mirrors back out when finished 2 62 Power Remote Control Rearview Mirrors If Equipped These controls are located on the driver
39. Oil 6 55 6 16 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 58 6 17 Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 59 6 20 Manual Transmission Fluid 6 63 6 21 Hydraulic Clutch 6 64 6 22 Rear Axle 6 64 6 23 Four Wheel Drive If Equipped 6 65 6 25 Engine Coolant 6 71 6 29 Radiator Pressure Cap 6 71 6 29 Power Steering Fluid 6 73 6 30 Windshield Washer Fluid Brakes Battery Bulb Replacement Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Tires Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Care of Safety Belts Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Vehicle Identification Number VIN Service Parts Identification Label Electrical System Replacement Bulbs Capacities and Specifications Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it We hope you ll go to your dealer for all your service needs You ll get genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people We hope you ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco n T NINE adele Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work you ll want to use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to do your ow
40. RANDOM will appear on the display Press this button again to turn off random play AM FM Press this button to listen to the radio when a compact disc is playing TAPE AUX Auxiliary Press this button if you have a disc loaded in the changer and the radio is turned on to play a compact disc Press this button to switch between playing a tape and console mounted CD changer if both are loaded If your vehicle is equipped with the AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player Bose all of the CD changer functions are controlled by the radio buttons except for ejecting the CD magazine 1 PREV Previous Press this pushbutton to go to the previous track if the current track has been playing for less than eight seconds If this pushbutton is pressed and the current track has been playing for more than eight seconds it will go to the beginning of the current track If you hold or press this pushbutton more than once the player will continue moving back through the disc The sound will mute while seeking 2 RDM Random Press this pushbutton to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order RANDOM will appear on the display Press this pushbutton again to turn off random play 3 NEXT Press this pushbutton to go to the next track If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once the player will continue moving forward through the disc The sound will mute while seeking REV 4 Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton t
41. REV and FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash showing that the broken tape detection feature is no longer active This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control If Equipped ees fl peed pee s mey oa ne GaN MEF m rao 5 Lg Playing the Radio PWR Power Press this knob to turn the system on and off VOL Volume Turn this knob clockwise to increase volume Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume The knob is capable of being turned continuously 3 15 RECALL Pressing this button will display the station being played or it will display the clock Clock display is available with the ignition turned off SCV Speed Compensated Volume With SCV your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Then as you drive SCV automatically increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use SCV turn the control all the way down Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display will show your selec
42. Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED 7 55 Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Here you will find out how to contact GMC if you need assistance This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects 8 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8 8 Courtesy Transportation 8 4 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone 8 10 Warranty Information TTY Users 8 10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United 8 4 Customer Assistance Offices States Government 8 5 GM Mobility Program for Persons 8 11 Reporting Safety Defects to the with Disabilities Canadian Government 8 6 Roadside Assistance 8 11 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors 8 7 Canadian Roadside Assistance Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to GMC Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss y
43. The radio will go to a preset station play for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station Press this button again to stop scanning When a cassette tape is playing press this button to go to the other side of the tape When a CD is playing in the CD changer press this button to select the next disc TAPE CD Press this button to switch between playing a tape or CD and console mounted CD changer if loaded The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening 3 64 Remote Cassette Tape Player If Equipped OC If your vehicle has this feature it is located in the front of the center console Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player To load a cassette tape with the ignition off first press EJECT on the remote player Then insert the cassette tape The tape will play if the ignition is on but the radio is off Once the tape is playing use the control knobs for VOL AUTO TONE BAL FADE BASS and TREB just as you do for the radio A lighted tape symbol shows when a cassette tape is in the player A lighted arrow will also appear and show the direction of play when a tape is active The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is metal or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound Anytime a cassette tape is inserted the top side is s
44. Vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt Wipe vinyl leather plastic and painted surfaces with a clean damp cloth 6 55 Cleaning of Fabric Carpet Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and carpet They will clean normal spots and stains very well You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Here are some cleaning tips Always read the instructions on the cleaner label Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set Carefully scrape off any excess stain e Use a clean cloth or sponge and change to a clean area often A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn Ifaring forms on fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately or it will set Using Cleaner on Fabric 1 Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt 2 Always clean a whole trim panel or section Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines 3 Follow the directions on the container label 6 56 4 Apply cleaner with a clean sponge Don t saturate the material and don t rub it roughly 5 As soon as you ve cleaned the section use a sponge to remove any excess cleaner 6 Wipe cleaned area with a clean water dampened towel or cloth 7 Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Stains caused by such things as catsup coffee black egg fruit fruit jui
45. Year Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D Body Lubrication Service Lubricate all hood hinges hood latch assembly secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl door hinges fuel door hinge endgate hinges outer tailgate handle pivot points tailgate hinges tailgate mounted spare tire if equipped glove box console doors moving seat hardware and folding seat hardware Part D tells you what to use More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment Starter Switch Check When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake See Parking Brake in the Index if necessary Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts On automatic transmission vehicles try to start the engine in each gear The starter should work only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If the starter works in any other position your vehicle needs service On manual transmission vehicles put the shift lever in NEUTRAL N push the clutch down halfway and try to start the engine The starter should work only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the floor If the starter works when the c
46. a heavy load driving on steep hills or winding roads or for off road driving SECOND 2 This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy than THIRD 3 You can use SECOND 2 on hills It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on You can also use SECOND 2 for starting your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces FIRST 1 This position gives you even more power but lower fuel economy than SECOND 2 You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is put in FIRST 1 while the vehicle is moving forward the transmission won t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough NOTICE If your rear wheels can t turn don t try to drive This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object You could damage your transmission Also if you stop when going uphill don t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal This could overheat and damage the transmission Use your brakes or shift into PARK P to hold your vehicle in position on a hill 2 29 Tow Haul Selector Button If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a tow haul selector button This button will be located on the floor console If your vehicle is equipped with the tow haul selector button you can use this feature to more effectively tow or h
47. about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the engine and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Don t let it happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then here are some tips Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a comfortably cool interior Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently If you get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service or parking area and take a nap get some exercise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency 4 38 Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain If you drive regularly in steep country or if you re planning to visit there here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable See Off Road Driving in the Index for information about driving off road Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transmission These parts can work hard on mountain roads Know how to go down hills The most important thing to know is this let your engine do some of the slowing down Shif
48. added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check the trailer hitch and platform and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when you re towing a trailer And because you re a good deal longer you ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns NOTICE Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause
49. and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km 7 11 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 18 000 Miles 30 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote
50. and go into cruise when you don t want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control 1 Move the cruise control switch to ON 2 Get up to the speed you want 3 Press in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake This of course shuts off the cruise control But you don t need to reset it Once you re going about 25 mph 40 km h or more you can move the cruise control switch briefly from ON to R A Resume Accelerate You ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there If you hold the switch at R A the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake So unless you want to go faster don t hold the switch at R A 2 53 Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed Press the button at the end of the lever then release the button and the accelerator pedal You ll now cruise at the higher speed Move the cruise switch from ON to R A Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want and then release the switch To increase your speed in very small amounts move the switch briefly to R A Each time you do this your vehicle will g
51. as possible in REVERSE R 4 22 As you are backing down the hill put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position This way you ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down It s best that you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover Here are some things you must not do if you stall or are about to stall when going up a hill Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into NEUTRAL N or pressing the clutch if you have a manual transmission to rev up the engine and regain forward momentum This won t work Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control Instead apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle Then apply the parking brake Shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back straight down Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle it s steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around If you can t make it up the hill you must back straight down the hill Q Suppose after stalling I try to back down the hill and decide I just can t do it What should I do Set the parking brake put your transmission in Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can PARK P or t
52. as the radio and air conditioner Voltmeter Gage When your engine is not running but the ignition is on in RUN this gage shows your battery s state of charge in DC volts VOLTS When the engine is running the gage shows the condition of the charging system Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle As engine speeds are increased this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power 2 89 You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone If you must drive turn off all unnecessary accessories Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible Shift Light You have the shift light on the instrument panel cluster if you have a manual transmission SHIFT Shifting when the indicator light is on will help you get the best fuel economy See Shift Light in the Index 2 90 Brake System Warning Light When the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on when you set your parking brake The light will stay on
53. at no charge Lock Out Replacement keys or locksmith service will be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle Delivery of the replacement key will be covered at no charge within 10 miles 16 km Emergency Towing Service Towing to the nearest GMC dealer for warranty related disablements will be covered Trip Routing Custom made computerized highlighted maps using the most direct or scenic route are provided free of charge Maps include points of interest and a list of GMC dealers along the route Also included is a list of hotels along the route that are discounted through affiliation with Quest International Trip Routing is available through Roadside Assistance by calling 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 Please be prepared to provide your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Allow five working days for fulfillment Trip Interruption Assistance GMC will reimburse any reasonable trip interruption expenses up to 500 00 when directly associated with warranty disablement Trip Interruption service covers expenses such as meals and overnight lodging if vehicle disablement occurs at least 150 miles 240 km from your home or rental property You will be required to obtain prior approval from GMC Roadside Assistance and pay for expenses at the time of disablement Original receipts should be submitted to GMC Roadside Assistance for reimbursement A service representative will provide assistance when you
54. call The Roadside Assistance services listed are available to retail and retail lease customers operating 2002 GMC light duty trucks for a period of 3 years 36 000 miles 60 000 km All services must be pre arranged by GMC Roadside Assistance Over the phone assistance such as providing the name of the closest dealer or minor technical advice etc is available to all owner operators of GMC trucks regardless of vehicle or mileage Just dial GMC Roadside Assistance at 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 Roadside Assistance prompt to reach a qualified representative who can assist you Text telephone TTY users call 1 888 889 2438 Your Roadside Assistance representative will ask for the following information when your call is received Vehicle Identification Number VIN Name and home address Telephone number and location from which you are calling Location license plate number and color of your GMC truck Mileage of vehicle and description of problem Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day 7 days a week 365 days a year including weekends and holidays Should you have any questions about roadside assistance call the GMC Roadside Assistance Center or contact your dealer Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty GMC reserves the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notificati
55. change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that your right outside mirror is convex The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is e Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Don t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you re being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right 4 14 Loss of Control Let s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration don t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency don t give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels aren t rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid
56. dangerous on any road And this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking See Drunken Driving in the Index 4 19 Driving on Off Road Hills Off road driving often takes you up down or across a hill Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can t do There are some hills that simply can t be driven no matter how well built the vehicle Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you can t control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness don t drive the hill Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill you need to decide if it s one of those hills that s just too steep to climb descend or cross Steepness can be hard to judge On a very small hill for example there may be a smooth constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top 4 20 On a large hill the incline may get steeper as you near the top but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is h
57. dealer 3 72 Disabling the Theft Deterrent Feature Enter your secret code as follows pause no more than 15 seconds between steps 1 Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press the and 4 pushbuttons at the same time Hold them down until SEC shows on the display 4 Press MN and 000 will appear on the display 5 Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 6 Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 7 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show indicating that the radio is no longer secured If the code entered is incorrect SEC will appear on the display The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered When battery power is removed and later applied to a secured radio the radio won t turn on and LOC will appear on the display To unlock a secured radio see Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss earlier in this section Theft Deterrent Feature RDS Radios If Equipped THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your radio The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN If the radio is moved to a different vehicle it will not operate and LOCKED or LOC will be displayed When the radio and vehicle are turned off the blinking red light indicates that THEFTL
58. dealer in the area where you ll be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area 2 25 Automatic Transmission Operation APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT FROM PARK PIRIN D3121 oo0ddd Your automatic transmission may have a shift lever located on the console between the seats or on the steering column There are several different positions for your shift lever 2 26 If your vehicle is equipped with a column shift lever it features an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument panel cluster This display must be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of PARK P This means that if your key is in OFF but not locked there will be a small current drain on your battery which could discharge your battery over a period of time If you need to leave your key in the ignition in OFF for an extended period it is recommended that you disconnect the battery cable from the battery to prevent discharging your battery PARK P This position locks your rear wheels It s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can t move easily It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine
59. drained much sooner And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor At 15 seconds the starter will automatically be disengaged Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter 2 If it doesn t start within 10 seconds push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor while you hold the ignition key in START When the engine starts let go of the key and let up on the accelerator pedal Wait about 15 seconds between each try 2 23 When starting your engine in very cold weather below 0 F or 18 C do this 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START and hold it there up to 15 seconds When the engine starts let go of the key 2 If your engine still won t start or starts but then stops it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds This clears the extra gasoline from the engine 2 24 NOTICE Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your de
60. five cargo tie downs in the rear of your vehicle that allow you to strap cargo in and keep it from moving Rear Convenience System If Equipped If the convenience system isn t secured properly it can move around in a collision or sudden stop People in the vehicle could be injured Be sure to secure the convenience system properly The convenience system located in the rear of your vehicle provides a place to store loose items in your vehicle 7M UA Dw p gt 4 4 Nt AN Ot Q an i ui s Q th Ko is A JN Collapsible Dividers Anchor Bracket Cargo Tie Down Plugs Partitions Soda Pop Gallon Jug Holder Partition Storage Cargo Tie Down Cutouts 2 71 To increase the space in the convenience system do the following 1 Remove the individual partitions C by pulling upward on the partitions Storage for the partitions is located in area F 2 Fold the collapsible dividers A by pulling upward and folding the dividers toward each other To reinstall or rearrange the partitions push down gently on the partitions making sure both sides fit into the appropriate slots of the collapsible dividers A Located on the top of each collapsible divider A are T pins designed to hold grocery bags etc in an upright position The anchor bracket cargo tie down plugs B located in the center and on each side of the convenience system nearest the p
61. fluid level only when your engine is off the vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the transmission case Then follow these steps 1 Remove the filler plug 2 Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of the filler plug hole 3 If the fluid level is good install the plug and be sure it is fully seated If the fluid level is low add more fluid as described in the next steps How to Add Fluid Here s how to add fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 1 Remove the filler plug 2 Add fluid at the filler plug hole Add only enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the filler plug hole 3 Install the filler plug Be sure the plug is fully seated Hydraulic Clutch The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is self adjusting The clutch master cylinder reservoir is filled with hydraulic clutch fluid It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system Adding fluid won t correct a leak A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired 6 21 When to Check and What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often you should check the fluid level in your clutch master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid
62. for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press this button again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning The channel number P1 through P6 will appear with the frequency The radio will scan preset stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while scanning 3 25 Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select AM FM1 or FM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer 5 Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons The sound will mute When it returns release the pushbutton Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return and the tone you selected will be automatically selected for that pushbutton 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton 3 26 Setting the Tone Bass Treble BASS Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass TREB Treble Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them AUTO TONE This feature allows you to choose bass and tr
63. generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks The law in an increasing number of U S states and throughout Canada sets the legal limit at 0 08 percent In some other countries the limit is even lower For example it is 0 05 percent in both France and Germany The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drinks in one hour Of course as we ve seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above A driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision Ata BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drin
64. in both the trim panel and the hardware cover 3 Pry the release lever toward the passenger s side until the glass latch pops open 4 Reattach the carpet securely 2 16 Endgate Mounted Spare If Equipped If your vehicle has an endgate mounted spare tire carrier you must move the carrier arm out of the way to open the glass Here s how to move the arm 1 Squeeze the release handle to free the carrier arm 2 Swing the carrier arm away from the endgate You may need to give it a slight tug 3 Latch the carrier arm by swinging it toward the endgate Theft Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal However there are ways you can help Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside it s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves so don t do it When you park your vehicle and open the driver s door you ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you Always do this Your steering wheel will be locked and so will your ignition If you have an automatic transmission taking your key out also locks your transmission Also remember to lock the doors Parking at Night Park in a lighted spot close all windows and lock your vehicle Remember to keep your valuables out of sigh
65. is allowed to work into the finish it can harm the leather Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions 6 57 Cleaning Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish Cleaning Wood Panels Use a clean cloth moistened in warm soapy water use mild dish washing soap Dry the wood immediately with a clean cloth Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water 6 58 Cleaning Glass Surfaces Glass should be cleaned often GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index NOTICE Don t use abrasive cleaners on glass because they may cause scratches Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window since they may have to be scraped off later If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window an electric defogger element may be damaged Any tempor
66. low If you have a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating in the Index A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C Protect against rust and corrosion Help keep the proper engine temperature Let the warning lights and gages work as they should NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty 6 25 What to Use Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which won t damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you don t need to add anything else Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fi
67. material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 6 52 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other the alignment may need to be reset If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your wheels may need to be rebalanced Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer
68. or goes away 6 65 Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can 6 66 Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block is located at the end of the instrument panel on the driver s side of the instrument panel Remove the cover by turning the fastener counterclockwise Extra fuses and the fuse extractor are provided in the cover To reinstall the fuse panel cover push in and turn the fastener clockwise et ms ctsyiP CIGAR HVAC Hvac CRUISE PWR L mR 4 a CLSTA PARK LP WPR RDO STR WHL uum att TS IGN WPR RDO IGN Fuse Circuit Usage Breaker A B 1 2 Not Used Not Used Not Used Cigarette Lighter Data Link Connector NOILYWHOJNI HOO 1d ASNA Fuse Circuit Usage Breaker 3 10 11 12 1
69. or pressed more than once the player will continue moving forward or backward through the tape SEEK and a positive or negative number will appear on the display AM FM Press this button to listen to the radio when a tape is playing The tape will stop but remain in the player TAPE CD Press this button to play a tape when listening to the radio Press this button to switch between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening EJT Eject Press this button to stop a tape when it is playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing Eject may be activated with the radio off Cassette tapes may be loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first Cassette Tape Messages CHK TAPE Check Tape If CHK TAPE appears on the radio display the tape won t play because of one of the following errors The tape is tight and the player can t turn the tape hubs Remove the tape Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil Turn the tape over and repeat If the hubs do not turn easily your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly The tape is broken Try a new tape The tape is wrapped around the tape head Attempt to get the cassette out Try a new tape CLEAN If this message appears on the display the casset
70. or until you press this pushbutton again The radio plays the last selected station during forward operation 3 65 AM FM Press this button to listen to the radio when a tape is playing The inactive tape will remain in the player CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to play a tape when listening to the radio The lighted arrow will appear next to the symbol and show the direction of play when a tape is active Remote Cassette Tape Player Controls The following functions are controlled by the remote cassette tape player PROG Program Press this button on the remote player to go from one side of the tape to the other EJECT Press this button on the remote player to remove the tape EJECT can be used with either the ignition or radio off Also you must press EJECT before loading a cassette with the radio off to allow loading 3 66 Console Mounted CD Changer If Equipped A aE a If your vehicle is equipped with the console mounted compact disc changer it is located in the center console Some vehicles may have this feature mounted in the front console just below the climate control system and accessory power outlets With the compact disc changer you can play up to six discs continuously Normal size discs may be played using the slots supplied in the magazine You must first load the magazine with discs before you can play a compact disc Load the CDs from bottom to top placing the discs in the magaz
71. panel regulates the fan speed To increase airflow move the knob clockwise To decrease airflow move it counterclockwise 3 2 Temperature Knob The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area of your vehicle Move the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer air Move the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air Mode Knob The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery OFF This mode turns the system off Some outside air will still enter the vehicle whenever the vehicle is moving forward MAX A C Maximum Air Conditioning This mode provides maximum cooling with the least amount of work MAX A C recirculates much of the air inside your vehicle so it cools quickly This setting directs most of the air through the instrument panel vents and a small amount through the floor ducts A C Air Conditioning This setting cools and dehumidifies the air entering your vehicle and directs most of the air through the instrument panel vents and a small amount through the floor ducts gt o Vad Bi Level Air Conditioning This setting cools and dehumidifies the air entering your vehicle and directs it through the floor ducts as well as the instrument panel outlets e rf Vent This setting directs most of the air through the instrument panel outlets and a small amount through the floor outlet
72. quickly within a track Press and hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six times the normal playing speed Press and hold it for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the normal playing speed Release it to play the passage The display will show ET and the elapsed time 4 FWD Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly within a track Press and hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six times the normal playing speed Press and hold it for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the normal playing speed Release it to play the passage The display will show ET and the elapsed time 6 RDM Random Press this pushbutton to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order RDM ON will appear on the display RDM T and the track number will appear on the display when each track starts to play Press this pushbutton again to turn off random play RDM OFF will appear on the display lt SEEK p Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current or previous track Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track If either of the arrows is held or pressed more then once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD 3 50 DISP Display Press this knob to see how long the current track has been playing ET and the elapsed time will appear on the display To change what is normally shown on the display track or elapsed time
73. radio will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the middle position To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed The radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the level display in the middle position AUTO TONE This feature allows you to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for country western jazz talk pop rock and classical stations Each time you press the AUTO TONE button this feature will switch to one of these program types To return the bass and treble to the manual mode press and release the AUDIO knob 3 43 Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade AUDIO To adjust the balance to the right and left speakers push and release the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display Turn the knob clockwise to move the sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to move the sound to the left speakers To adjust the fade to the front and rear speakers push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears on the display Turn the knob clockwise to move the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise to move the sound to the rear speakers To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until the radio produces one beep The balance and fade will be adjusted to the middle position and the display will show the speaker balance To a
74. rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop your disc brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts If you don t your brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts 6 35 Battery Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free ACDelco battery When it s time for a new battery get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label We recommend an ACDelco battery See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for battery location WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling 6 36 Vehi
75. running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P If you have four wheel drive your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL CAUTION Continued So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL See Four Wheel Drive Automatic Transfer Case in the Index See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK P before starting the engine Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition key is in RUN If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever push the shift lever all the way into PARK P press the button in on the console shift lever as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish See Shifting Out of PARK P in the Index 2 27 REVERSE R Use this gear to back up NOTICE Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transmission Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped To rock your vehicle back and f
76. section If your vehicle is equipped with the AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player Bose all of the CD changer functions are controlled by the radio buttons except for ejecting the CD magazine 1 PREV Previous Press this pushbutton to go to the previous track if the current track has been playing for less than eight seconds If this pushbutton is pressed and the current track has been playing for more than eight seconds it will go to the beginning of the current track If you hold or press this pushbutton more than once the player will continue moving back through the disc The sound will mute while seeking 2 PROG Program Press this pushbutton to select a disc The disc number and track number will be displayed 3 NEXT Press this pushbutton to go to the next track If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once the player will continue moving forward through the disc The sound will mute while seeking REV 4 Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly through a track Release it to resume playing 3 68 FWD 6 Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly through a track Release it to resume playing lt SEEK D Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track on the CD Press the left SEEk arrow to go to the previous track on the CD The sound will mute while seeking P SCAN Preset Scan Press this button to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order
77. security lock is on unlock the door and open the door from the outside 2 9 Lockout Prevention This feature stops the power door locks from locking when the keys are in the ignition and a door is open to protect you from locking your key in the vehicle If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open and the key is in the ignition all the doors will lock and the driver s door will unlock Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle take your key open your door and set the locks from inside Then get out and close the door 2 10 Keyless Entry System If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature you can lock and unlock your doors from about 3 feet 1 m up to 30 feet 9 m away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may ca
78. some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole Use care not to overtighten the plug 6 23 What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index 6 24 How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you may need to add some lubricant When the differential is cold add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1 2 inch 12 mm below the filler plug hole When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is
79. spare tire lock two door vehicles and door locks It will fit with either side up When a new vehicle is delivered the dealer provides the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key code number 2 5 The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified Door Locks locksmith how to make extra keys Keep this number in a safe place If you lose your keys you ll be able to have new ones made easily using this number Your selling dealer should also have this number NOTICE Your vehicle has a number of new features that can help prevent theft But you can have a lot of Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle won t open it You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren t locked So wear safety belts properly and lock the doors trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your key inside You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in So be sure you have an extra key whenever you drive Young children who get into unlocked If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle contact vehicles may be unable to get out A child roadside assistance for help See Roadside Assistance can be overcome by extreme heat and can in the Index for more information suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock your vehicle
80. strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to rinse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Don t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle 6 59 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Your vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish 6 60 NOTICE Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks Foreign materials such as calcium chlo
81. system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON OR CHECK ENGINE light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test 2 93 If the Light Is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle Reducing vehicle speed Avoiding hard accelerations Avoiding steep uphill grades If you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service 2 94 If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install
82. the inside of your windows Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle Audio Systems Your audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first Find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all of its controls to be sure you re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it Setting the Clock for Systems with the Set Button Press SET Within five seconds press and hold the right SEEK arrow until the correct minute appears on the display Press and hold the left SEEK arrow until the correct hour appears on the display Setting the Clock for Systems with HR and MN Buttons Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the display Press and hold MN until the correct minute appears on the display To display the clock with the ignition off press RECALL or HR MN and the time will be displayed for a few seconds There is an initial two second delay before the clock goes into the time set mode Setting the Clock for Systems with Radio Data System Your radio may have a button marked with an H or HR to represent hours and an M MN or MIN to represent minutes Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour appears AM or PM will appear on the display for morning hours Press and hold the minute butto
83. the vehicle on the lower left side of the instrument panel 2 Lift the hood 3 Release the hood prop from its retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in the hood Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer Then pull the hood down firmly to close It will latch when dropped from about 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm without pressing on the hood When you open the hood you will see the following A Battery E Automatic Transmission Dipstick H Engine Air Cleaner Filter B Coolant Recovery Tank If Equipped I Clutch Master Cylinder Reservoir C Engine Oil Dipstick F Power Steering Reservoir J Engine Compartment Fuse Block D Engine Oil Fill G Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir K Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The oil dipstick handle is a yellow ring located in the engine compartment toward the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you don t the oil dipstick might not s
84. the cap See Filling Your Tank in the Index The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel See Fuel in the Index Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed Emissions Inspection an
85. the ignition is on the fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have remaining 2 99 Low Fuel Light The LOW FUEL light will come on briefly when you are starting the engine LOW FUEL This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel To turn it off add fuel to the fuel tank See Fuel in the Index Driver Information Center DIC If Equipped This system displays the outside air temperature compass direction and trip information in the overhead console US MET United States Metric The US MET United States metric button allows you to switch the display between the English and metric system MODE The MODE button can be used to toggle between three modes of operation OFF COMP TEMP and TRIP 2 100 COMP TEMP Compass Temperature The display provides the outside temperature and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle the temperature indicated will be the last outside temperature recorded with the ignition on If the outside temperature is 37 F 3 C or lower the display will toggle between the word ICE and the current temperature every eight seconds This is a warning to the driver that road conditions may be icy and that appropriate precautions should be taken The compass is self calibrating so it does not need to be manually set However if C Calibration is displayed the compass will need
86. the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance 4 59 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer When you tow a trailer your vehicle has to have extra wiring and a heavy duty turn signal flasher included in the optional trailering package The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well 4 60 If you have an automatic transmission you can tow in DRIVE D You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the
87. the vehicle s owner For many years add on child restraints have used the adult belt system in the vehicle To help reduce the chance of injury the child also has to be secured within the restraint The vehicle s belt system secures the add on child restraint in the vehicle and the add on child restraint s harness system holds the child in place within the restraint One system the three point harness has straps that A booster seat F G is a child restraint designed to come down over ceachof theinfant s sho ldersa d improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system Some puckle together at thematch The five point booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner and some h temm h s ho lder sti two hi high back booster seats have a five point harness A pak dick TAS FWO STOUCST SApS IWO SIP booster seat can also help a child to see out the window straps and a crotch strap A shield may take the place of hip straps A T shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child s body A shelf or armrest type shield has straps that are attached to a wide shelf like shield that swings up or to the side 1 45 When choosing a child restraint be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards Then follow the instructions for the restraint You may find these instru
88. this knob to choose radio stations lt q SEEK P Press the right or left arrow to seek to the next or previous station and stay there The radio will seek to stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while seeking lt q PSCAN P Preset Scan Press and hold one of the arrows for more than two seconds and the radio will produce one beep The radio will scan to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons play for a few seconds and flash the station frequency then go on to the next preset station Press one of the arrows or one of the pushbuttons again to stop scanning SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner is in the preset scan mode The channel number P1 through P6 will appear with the frequency In FM mode this function will scan through the current band such as FM1 or FM2 The radio will scan preset stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while scanning 3 30 Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select AM FM1 or FM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and treble equalization that best suits the type of station you are listening to 5 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons The radio will produce one beep Whenever you press that numbered
89. tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt iy N GAY ANZ SY H W The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And yov d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor 1 17 Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body OOF E P A al F A SQ The shoulder belt is too loose It won t give nearly as much protection this way 1 18 Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you
90. too steep will make your vehicle roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline don t drive across it Find another route instead Q What if I m driving across an incline that s not too steep but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill What should I do A If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping However a much better way to prevent this is to get out and walk the course so you know what the surface is like before you drive it Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you re crossing an incline be sure you and your passengers get out on the uphill side even if the door there is harder to open If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over you ll be right in its path If you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over Getting out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed or killed Always get out on the uphill high side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path 4 27 Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand your wheels won t get good traction You can t accelerate as quickly turning is more difficu
91. turn on the ignition and one will stay on If the lights do not come on you should take your vehicle in for service An indicator light will flash while shifting It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed Shifting from 2HI to 4HI Press and release the 4HI button This can be done at any speed and the front axle will lock automatically Shifting from 4HI to 2HI Press and release the 2HI button This can be done at any speed and the front axle will unlock automatically 2 34 Shifting from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO To shift from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission or the clutch pedal engaged in vehicles equipped with a manual transmission The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4LO button You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal If the 4LO button is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4LO indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph 4 8 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N or the clutch pedal engaged On automatic transmission equipped vehicles if your transfer case does not shift into
92. used when pulling it away from the vehicle A Claw in Notch B Correct Installation C Incorrect Installation 6 44 Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions Underinflated tires pose the same danger as about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see overloaded tires The resulting accident your GM Warranty booklet for details could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index CAUTION Continued 6 45 Inflation Tire Pressure The Certification Tire label which is on the driver s door edge above the door latch shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they re cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km 6 46 NOT
93. vehicles Utility vehicles do have a higher ground clearance and a narrower track or shorter wheelbase than passenger cars to make them more capable for off road driving Specific design characteristics like these give the driver a better view of the road but also give utility vehicles a higher center of gravity than other types of vehicles This means that you shouldn t expect a utility vehicle to handle the same way a vehicle with a lower center of gravity like a car would in similar situations But driver behavior factors are far more often the cause of a utility vehicle rollover than are environmental or vehicle factors Safe driver behavior and understanding the environment in which you ll be driving can help avoid a rollover crash in any type of vehicle including utility vehicles Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is Drive defensively Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle Buckle up See Safety Belts in the Index Defensive driving really means be ready for anything On city streets rural roads or freeways it means always expect the unexpected Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do Be ready for their mistakes Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance It s the best defensive driving maneu
94. wheels for extra traction To get the most satisfaction out of four wheel drive you must be familiar with its operation Read the part that follows before using four wheel drive You should use two wheel high 2HI for most normal driving conditions OTICE Driving in the 4HI or 4LO positions for a long time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the life of your vehicle s drivetrain Electronic Transfer Case If Equipped If your four wheel drive vehicle has the electronic transfer case the transfer case buttons are to the right of the steering wheel on the instrument panel Use these buttons to shift into and out of four wheel drive You can choose among three driving settings 2HI This setting is for driving in most street and highway situations Your front axle is not engaged in two wheel drive When this lamp is lit it is about one half as bright as the others 4HI This setting engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle Use 4HI when you need extra traction such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations 2 33 4LO This setting also engages your front axle to give you extra traction You may never need 4LO It sends the maximum power to all four wheels You might choose 4LO if you were driving off road in sand mud or deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills Indicator lights in the buttons show you which setting you are in The indicator lights will come on briefly when you
95. when work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid See Periodic Maintenance Inspections in the Index Checking Brake Fluid You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap Just look at the brake fluid reservoir The fluid level should be above MIN If it isn t have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark What to Add When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake fluid Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system your brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid 6 33 NOTICE Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they ll have to be replaced Don t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s pai
96. will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement NOTICE The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index for more information 6 53 Used Replacement Wheels Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You can t know how it s been used or how far it s been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel 6 54 Tire Chains Don t use tire chains There s not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper a
97. will turn off automatically If you use your keyless entry transmitter if equipped to unlock your vehicle the interior lamps will come on for a short time whether or not the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position Exit Lighting With exit lighting the interior lamps will come on when you remove the key from the ignition to help you see while exiting the vehicle If the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position these lamps will stay on for a short period of time and then will go out Front Reading Lamps If Equipped Press the button located near each lamp on the overhead console to turn a reading lamp on and off The lamps can be swiveled to point in the desired direction If you have the mini console press the lens on each lamp to turn it on or off Front Map Lamps If Equipped If your vehicle has front map lamps they are located on the inside rearview mirror They will automatically come on for approximately 40 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the keyless entry transmitter if equipped or until the ignition key is turned to RUN or ACCESSORY The lamps will also stay on for approximately 40 seconds after you exit the vehicle unless you lock the doors with the keyless entry transmitter You can also turn the lamps on and off by pressing the button near each lamp Dome Lamps The dome lamps will come on when you open a door You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the thumbwheel located next to t
98. working Turn Signal On Chime If your turn signal is left on for more than 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal To turn off the chime move the turn signal lever to the off position Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high to low pull the multifunction lever all the way toward you Then release it When the high beams are on this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on Flash to Pass Feature This feature lets you use your high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic position To use it pull the turn signal lever toward you but not so far that you hear a click If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam your high beam headlamps will turn on They ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you and the high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on Release the lever to return to normal operation 2 49 Windshield Wipers To operate the windshield wipers turn the band located on the multifunction lever upward or downward MIST Turn the band to MIST for a single wiping cycle Hold it until the windshield wipers start Then let it go The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe If you want more wipes hold the band on MIST longer 2 50 OFF Turn the band to OFF to
99. your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect 7 49 Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year for instance each spring and fall You should let your dealer s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual See Service and Owner Publications in the Index Steering Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose o
100. 2377985 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements Engine Coolant 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable of NLGI 2 Category LB water and use only GM or GC LB Goodwrench DEX COOL or Havoline DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant in the Index Engine Oil in the Index Power GM Power Steering Fluid Steering System GM Part No 1052884 1 pint 1050017 1 quart or equivalent 7 52 USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Manual Synchromesh Transmission Fluid Rear Axle Axle Lubricant use only GM Part Transmission GM Part No 12345349 or Locking No 1052271 Do not add friction equivalent Differential modifier Automatic DEXRON III Automatic Transfer Case AUTO TRAK II Fluid Transmission Transmission Fluid GM Part No 12378508 Multi Purpose Lubricant Electronic DEXRON III Automatic Superlube GM Part Transfer Case Transmission Fluid No 12346241 or equivalent AUTO TRAK II Fluid Chassis Chassis Lubricant GM Part Transfer Case GM Part No 12378508 Lubrication No 12377985 or equivalent or Rear Driveline Chassis Lubricant GM Part lubricant meeting requirements Center Spline No 12377985 or equivalent or of NLGI 2 Category LB and Universal lubricant meeting requirements or GC LB Joints of NLGI 2 Category LB Front and Rear SAE 80W 90 Axle Lubricant GM or GC LB Axle Standard Part No 1052271 or equivalent Differential 7 53 USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT USAGE F
101. 3 Cruise Control Module and Switch Body Control Module Heated Seats Gages Body Control Module Instrument Panel Cluster Parking Lamps Power Window Switch Body Control Module Ashtray Lamp Steering Wheel Radio Controls Headlamps Switch Body Control Module Headlamp Relay Courtesy Lamps Battery Run Down Protection HVAC Control Head Manual Turn Signal Cluster Engine Control Module Interior Lights Auxiliary Power 6 67 Fuse Circuit Usage Breaker 6 68 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Power Locks Motor 4WD Switch Engine Controls VCM PCM Transmission Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Front Wiper Steering Wheel Radio Controls Radio Battery Amplifier HVAC Manual HVAC I Automatic HVAC Sensors Automatic Anti Lock Brakes Rear Wiper Radio Ignition Engine Compartment Fuse Block The engine compartment fuse block is located under the hood on the driver s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location Before using this fuse block picture and chart check to see that it matches the fuse block in your vehicle If the fuse block pictured here is different than your vehicle s use the fuse block picture and chart located later in this section Remove the cover by turning the fastener counterclockwise To reinstall the fuse panel cover push in and turn the fastener clockwise FUSE PULLER B
102. 4 313 kg 3 73 5 100 Ibs 2 313 kg 9 500 Ibs 4 313 kg Four Wheel Drive Four Door Manual Trans 3 42 3 600 Ibs 1 633 kg 8 000 Ibs 3 632 kg The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment and conversions The GCWR for your vehicle should not be exceeded Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight The weight of the trailer tongue also affects the maximum trailer weight See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section 4 54 You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at the address listed in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle And if you will tow a
103. 4LO your transmission indicator switch may require adjustment With your transmission in NEUTRAL N press and release the 4LO button While the 4LO indicator light is flashing shift your transmission into PARK P Wait until the 4LO indicator light remains illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear This will get you into 4LO but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore normal operation Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI To shift from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N or the clutch pedal engaged The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4HI button You must wait for the 4HI indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal If the 4HI button is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but not complete the shift unless the vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph 4 8 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N or the clutch pedal engaged On automatic transmission equipped vehicles if your transfer case does not shift into 4HI your transmission indicator switch may require adjustment With your transmission in NEUTRAL N press and release the 4HI button While the 4HI indicator light is flashing
104. 90 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 19 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 57 000 Miles 95 000 km a ooo Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first i i See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity j
105. An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first ooo i See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 16 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Repl
106. FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control If Equipped AM FM Stergo with Cassette Tape Player Bose If Equipped AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control If Equipped 3 29 3 37 P Nn Y2 GW GW W GW WW WW WO SSN Ne ee ee ee NUAUAAD WDWDOUNDNBWWYORAKNY AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player with Radio Data System RDS and Automatic Tone Control If Equipped AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player Bose If Equipped AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and Compact Disc Player with Radio Data System RDS and Automatic Tone Control If Equipped AM FM Stereo with Six Disc Compact Disc Player with Programmable Equalization and Radio Data System RDS If Equipped Rear Seat Audio RSA If Equipped Remote Cassette Tape Player If Equipped Console Mounted CD Changer If Equipped Theft Deterrent Feature If Equipped Theft Deterrent Feature RDS Radios If Equipped Audio Steering Wheel Controls If Equipped Understanding Radio Reception Tips About Your Audio System Care of Your Cassette Tape Player Care of Your Remote Cassette Tape Player Care of Your Compact Discs Care of Your Compact Disc Player Fixed Mast Antenna Comfort Controls With this system you can control the heating cooling and ventilation in your vehicle Standard Climate Control System Fan Knob The knob on the left side of the climate control system control
107. HomeLink for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Erasing Channels To erase all three programmed channels hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds Release both buttons Resetting Defaults To reset HomeLink to default settings hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink indicator light turns off and then release both buttons Accessories Accessories for the HomeLink Transmitter are available from the manufacturer of the unit If you would like additional information please contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com 2 81 The Instrument Panel Your Information System 2 82 The main components of your instrument panel are the following Air Vents Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Instrument Panel Cluster Transfer Case Button If Equipped Exterior Lamps Control Fog Lamp Button if equipped Brake Release TAM MTDAWD gt Audio Steering Controls If Equipped 2 Og 2 A Se Rear Window Washer Wiper Rear Endgate Release Ashtray Comfort Controls Rear Window Defogger Accessory Power Outlets Audio System Glove Box 2 83 Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument panel cluster is d
108. ICE Don t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right It s not If your tires don t have enough air underinflation you can get the following Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Bad wear Bad handling Bad fuel economy If your tires have too much air overinflation you can get the following Unusual wear Bad handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Also check the tire pressure of the spare tire If you have a compact spare tire it should be at 60 psi 420 kPa How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You can t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflated Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 6 000 to 8 000 miles 10 000 to 13 000 km Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It s Time for New Tires and Wheel Replacement later in this section for more information Make sure the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the c
109. LUID LUBRICANT Constant Chassis Lubricant GM Part Hood and Door Multi Purpose Lubricant Velocity No 12377985 or equivalent or Hinges Superlube GM Part Universal Joint lubricant meeting requirements No 12346241 or equivalent of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Tailgate Multi Purpose Lubricant Mounted S Clutch Pushrod Chassis Lubricant GM Part enna SE Superlube GM Part Sarna t to Clutch Fork No 12377985 or equivalent or a N No 12346241 or equivalent Tailgate Handle Pivot Points and Hinges 5 roe rie ieee se pera Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease GM SSS Sa OMI Part No12 110271 0n Conditioning Part No 12345579 or equivalent Secondary Latch equivalent or lubricant meeting Pivots Spring requirements of NLGI 2 Weatherstrip Synthetic Grease with Teflon Anchor and Category LB or GC LB Squeaks Superlube GM Part Release Pawl No 12371287 or equivalent Joint lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB 7 54 Part E Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services or Periodic Maintenance can be added on the following record pages Also you should retain all maintenance receipts Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them Maintenance
110. Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you re ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you re not fresh such as after a day s work don t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it s ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course you ll find experienced and able service experts in GM dealerships all across North America They Il be ready and willing to help if you need it Here are some things you can check before a trip Windshield Washer Fluid Is the reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades Are they in good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean Tires They are vitally important to a safe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure Weather Forecasts What s the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system Maps Do you have up to date maps 4 37 Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hypnosis lack of awareness or whatever There is something
111. N and 000 will appear on the display Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code Press AM FM and this time the display will show SEC to let you know that your radio is secure The LED indicator by the volume knob will begin flashing when the ignition is turned off 3 71 Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss Enter your secret code as follows pause no more than 15 seconds between steps 1 Turn the ignition on LOC will appear on the display 2 Press MN and 000 will appear on the display 3 Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 4 Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 5 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show SEC indicating the radio is now operable and secure If you enter the wrong code eight times INOP will appear on the display You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on before you can try again When you try again you will only have three chances to enter the correct code before INOP appears If you lose or forget your code contact your
112. NG LIST button to turn song list on S LIST will appear on the display 3 Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more than four seconds A beep will be heard followed by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep will be heard after four seconds S LIST EMPTY will appear on the display indicating that the song list has been deleted If a disc is ejected and the song list contains saved tracks from that disc those tracks are automatically deleted from the song list Any tracks saved to the song list again are added to the bottom of the list To end song list mode press the SONG LIST button One beep will be heard and S LIST will be removed from the display Compact Disc Messages CHECK CD If this message appears on the radio display it could be due to one of the following reasons The road is too rough The disc should play when the road is smoother The disc is dirty scratched wet or upside down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected contact your dealer If your radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem 3 61 This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources AM FM cassette tapes and CDs through the Rear Seat Audio RSA controller H
113. OCK is armed With THEFTLOCK activated your radio will not operate if stolen Audio Steering Wheel Controls If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature you can control certain radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel PROG Program Press this button to go to a station you have programmed on the radio preset buttons on the selected band If a cassette tape is playing press this button to play the other side of the tape If a compact disc is playing in the console mounted CD changer if equipped press this button to go to the next available CD 3 73 A SEEK V Press the up or down arrow to seek to the next or previous radio station and stay there If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing the player will advance with the up arrow and reverse with the down arrow MUTE Press this button to silence the system Press it again to turn on the sound A VOL YV Volume Press the up or down arrow to increase or decrease volume 3 74 Understanding Radio Reception AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range however can cause stations to interfere with each other AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interf
114. See Owner Checks and Services and Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index How to Check and Add Fluid The proper fluid should be added if the level does not reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it s in place in the reservoir See the instructions on the reservoir cap 6 22 Rear Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Four Wheel Drive If Equipped Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these vehicles However there are two additional systems that need lubrication Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant See Periodic Maintenance Inspections in the Index How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add
115. Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you can t there isn t room That s the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes See Braking in Emergencies earlier in this section It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available 4 11 An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly 4 12 Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you re driving If the level of the shoul
116. The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD Press RECALL to make ERR go off of the display If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected contact your dealer AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player with Radio Data System RDS and Automatic Tone Control If Equipped Playing the Radio PWR Power Press this knob to turn the system on and off VOL Volume Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume AUTO VOL Automatic Volume With automatic volume your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Press this button to select LOW MEDIUM or HIGH AVOL will appear on the display The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive Each higher volume setting allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Then as you drive automatic volume increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed NONE will appear on the display if the radio cannot determine the vehicle speed If you don t want to use automatic volume select OFF DISP Display Press this knob when the ignition is off to display the clock 3 29 Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE Turn
117. Transmission Operation Manual Transmission Operation Four Wheel Drive If Equipped Parking Brake Shifting Into PARK P Automatic Transmission Only 2 44 2 45 2 45 2 46 2 47 2 48 2 55 2 58 2 60 2 63 2 75 2 77 2 78 2 82 2 87 2 100 Shifting Out of PARK P Automatic Transmission Only Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust Running Your Engine While You re Parked Automatic Transmission Locking Rear Axle Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Exterior Lamps Interior Lamps Mirrors Storage Compartments Accessory Power Outlets Sunroof If Equipped HomeLink Transmitter If Equipped The Instrument Panel Your Information System Warning Lights Gages and Indicators Driver Information Center DIC If Equipped 2 1 Windows Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous A child can be overcome by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather Manual Windows Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower your manual side door windows Power Windows If Equipped If you have power windows the controls are located on the armrests on each of the side doors The switches operate the windows when the ignition is in RUN ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power in the
118. VERSE R To back up press the clutch pedal wait about six seconds then shift into REVERSE R Then let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal NOTICE Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving could damage your transmission Use REVERSE R along with the parking brake for parking your vehicle 2 31 Shift Light If Equipped If you have a manual transmission you have a SHIFT light on your instrument panel cluster SHIFT This light will show you when to shift to the next higher gear for best fuel economy When this light comes on you can shift to the next higher gear if weather road and traffic conditions let you For the best fuel economy accelerate slowly and shift when the light comes on 2 32 While you accelerate it is normal for the light to go on and off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift If you skip a gear when you downshift you could lose control of your vehicle You could injure yourself or others Don t shift down more than one gear at a time when you downshift If your vehicle has four wheel drive and is equipped with a manual transmission disregard the SHIFT light when the transfer case is in 4LO Four Wheel Drive If Equipped If your vehicle has four wheel drive you can send your engine s driving power to all four
119. able See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools in the Index The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle The first rotation is the most important See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals 6 47 If your vehicle has a compact spare tire or a spare tire that does not match your vehicle s regular road tires and wheels in size and type do not include the spare in the tire rotation After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Certification Tire label Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque in the Index Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off See in the Index When rotating your tires always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here 6 48 When It s Time for New Tires One way to tell when it s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or les
120. accelerated corrosion rust can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection 6 62 At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody vehicle washing system can do this for you Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ringlet shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this GM will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials PARTNUMBER SIZE DESCRIPTION 994954 Polishing Cloth Wax Treated 1050172 Tar and Road Oil Remover 1050173 Chrome Cleaner and Polish 1050174 White Sidewall Tire Cleaner 1050214 Vinyl Cleaner 1050427 Glass Cleaner 1052929 16 oz 0 473 L Chrome and Wire Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels and Wheel Cleaner wire wheel covers 12377964 16 oz 0 473 L Finish Enhancer Removes dust fingerprints an
121. ace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote 7 17 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 48 000 Miles 80 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 50 000 Miles 83 000 km If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter Manual transmission fluid doesn t require change Automatic Transfer Case Only Change transfer case fluid 7 18 Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 51 000 Miles 85 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 54 000 Miles
122. aler If you don t your engine might not perform properly Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped In very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can help You ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle At temperatures above 32 F 0 C use of the coolant heater is not required To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is located on the driver s side of the engine compartment behind the underhood fuse block 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord won t reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you don t it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your
123. an be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who doesn t lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness the inability to see in dim light and aren t even aware of it 4 31 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble On a wet TT Lin LL My Wh road you can t stop accelerate or turn as well because your tire to road traction isn t as good as on dry roads And if your tires don t have much tread left you ll get even less traction It s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
124. and wheel wrench B Your vehicle may also have an optional hub cap removal tool 5 22 Position the chisel end of your wheel wrench or the hub cap removal tool if equipped in the notch of the hub cap and pry off the hub cap Some of the molded plastic hub caps have imitation wheel nuts molded into them The wheel wrench won t fit these imitation nuts so don t try to remove them with the socket end of the wheel wrench If you have individual wheel nut caps that cover each nut they must be removed in order to get to the wheel nuts Use the socket end of the wheel wrench to remove the wheel nut caps Your wheel nut caps may attach your hub cap to the wheel Remove these wheel nut caps before you take off the hub cap Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire A Front Frame Hole B Rear Frame Hole 2 Door or Spring Hanger Hole 4 Door 1 Using the wheel wrench loosen all the wheel nuts Don t remove them yet 2 Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jack lift head 3 Fit the jack into the appropriate hole nearest the flat tire 5 24 Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid persona
125. aneous Economy Instantaneous fuel economy for the last second of driving is displayed RANGE The display indicates the estimated distance that can be travelled with the remaining fuel in the tank based on the fuel economy for the last few hours of driving FUEL USED The fuel used since the last reset is displayed AVG SPEED Average Speed The average speed since the last reset is displayed To reset the trip computer press the MODE and US MET buttons simultaneously for at least two seconds All functions will be displayed briefly once the system is reset Reset can only be performed in the AVG ECON FUEL USED and AVG SPEED modes All three modes are reset simultaneously 2 101 NOTES 2 102 Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems SSI O lll Ml In this section you ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle WW WW Wo LOW WW WW WwW Loa YQ AAAA ARONO ri Comfort Controls Standard Climate Control System Air Conditioning Heating Defogging and Defrosting Rear Window Defogger If Equipped Ventilation System Audio Systems Setting the Clock for Systems with SET Button Setting the Clock for Systems with HR and MN Buttons Setting the Clock for Systems with Radio Data System AM FM Stereo AM FM Stereo AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player If Equipped AM
126. ard through the tape SEEK and a positive number will appear on the display Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for next to work The sound will mute while seeking 3 REV Reverse Press this pushbutton to reverse the tape rapidly Press it again to return to playing speed The radio will play the last selected station while the tape reverses The station frequency and REV will appear on the display You may select stations during reverse operation by using the TUNE DISP and SEEK 4 FWD Forward Press this pushbutton to advance quickly to another part of the tape Press this pushbutton again to return to playing speed The radio will play the last selected station while the tape advances The station frequency and FWD will appear on the display You may select stations during forward operation by using TUNE DISP and SEEK 5 SIDE Press this pushbutton to play the other side of the tape 3 48 6 DO Dolby Press this pushbutton to reduce background noise NR ON will appear on the display Press it again to turn Dolby NR off NR OFF will appear on the display Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation lt SEEK p gt The right arrow is the same as the NEXT pushbutton and the left arrow is the same as the PREV pushbutton If the arrow is held
127. ary license should not be attached across the defogger grid Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a full strength glass cleaning liquid The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water Don t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing soap Don t use
128. assenger compartment are used to help seal the convenience system However the plugs also cover the anchor bracket cargo tie downs To remove the plugs grasp the edges of the plugs and pull straight out See Child Restraints and Top Strap in the Index for more information on using anchor brackets 2 72 There are two cutouts E for the rear cargo tie downs located near the endgate sill In order to access the rear cargo tie downs the cutouts must be removed You will also find a soda pop gallon jug holder D on the passenger side of the convenience system Some vehicles do not have this feature but instead include a smaller storage area To remove the entire convenience system do the following 1 Remove the convenience net if it is in place See Convenience Net in the Index for more information You may also want to remove the partitions C and fold the collapsible dividers A to make the convenience system easier to handle 2 Grasp the sides of the convenience system and push the sides together while sliding the unit out until it clears the sides of the endgate opening To reinstall the convenience system reverse the removal procedure Luggage Carrier Option If you try to carry something on top of your vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage carrier like paneling plywood a mattress and so forth the wind can catch it as you drive along This can cause you to lose control Wh
129. at you are carrying could be violently torn off and this could cause you or other drivers to have a collision and of course damage your vehicle You may be able to carry something like this inside But never carry something longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle The luggage carrier has slats side rails and crossrails attached to the roof to secure cargo The adjustable tie downs at both ends of the crossrails should be used to secure loads to the luggage carrier Use GM accessory racks that are compatible with your luggage carrier for transporting sports equipment These are available through your dealer You can adjust the crossrails to handle loads of various sizes Just loosen the slider knobs at each end of the crossrail and move them to where you want them Make sure both sides of the crossrails are even then tighten the slider knobs Be sure the cargo is properly loaded Follow these guidelines Carrying small heavy loads on the roof is not recommended Secure the load using the tie downs at both ends of the crossrails When loading cargo directly on the roof panel use the crossrails to keep the load from shifting If you need to carry long items move the crossrails as far apart as possible Tie the load to the tie downs provided Also tie the load to the bumpers Do not tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or side rails are damaged 2 73 NOTICE Loading cargo th
130. at weighs more than 200 Ibs 91 kg on the luggage carrier may damage your vehicle When you carry large things never let them hang over the rear or the sides of your vehicle When loading cargo on the roof panel be sure it rests on the slats and does not scratch or damage the vehicle Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten it securely to the luggage carrier Put the main weight as far forward as you can and move the rear crossrail forward as far as possible to keep the load from shifting Don t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading Your Vehicle in the Index To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you re driving check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still securely fastened 2 74 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter Pull the front ashtray door down to open it NOTICE Don t put papers and other things that burn into your ashtray If you do cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire causing damage To remove the front ashtray pull the bin upward To use the lighter press it in all the way and let go When it s ready it will pop back out by itself NOTICE Don t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating If you do it won t be able to back away from the heating element when it s ready That can make it overload damaging the
131. atback isn t locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked Easy Entry Seat 2 Door Models The right front seat of your vehicle makes it easy to get in and out of the rear seat 1 Tilt the right front seatback completely forward and the whole seat will slide forward 2 Move the seatback to its original position after someone gets into the rear seat area Then move the seat rearward until it locks If an easy entry right front seat isn t locked it can move In a sudden stop or crash the person sitting there could be injured After you ve used it be sure to push rearward on an easy entry seat to be sure it is locked Tilt the seatback completely forward and slide the whole seat forward again to get out of the rear seat Rear Seats Your vehicle has a folding rear seat which lets you fold the seatbacks down for more cargo space The rear seat release handles are located on the rear of the seatbacks Push back on the seatbacks as you pull up on the handles The head restraint will automatically fold out of the way when the seatback is folded down To raise the seatbacks just lift up the seatbacks and push until they lock in the upright position Push and pull on the seatbacks to check that the latches have locked in the upright position If they haven t see your dealer for serv
132. ation Shifting to 4HI or AUTO 4WD Press and release the 4HI or AUTO 4WD button This can be done at any speed and the indicator light will flash while shifting It will remain illuminated when the shift is complete 2 37 Shifting to 2HI Press and release the 2HI button This can be done at any speed Shifting to 4LO To shift to 4LO the vehicle s engine must be running and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N or with the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with manual transmission The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4LO button You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear If the 4LO button is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4LO indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N or with the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with manual transmission After 30 seconds the transfer case will return to the setting last chosen 2 38 Shifting Out of 4LO To shift from 4LO to 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N or with the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with manual
133. aul a heavy load To select the tow haul mode press the button The Tow Haul light on the instrument panel cluster will come on To go back to normal operation press the button again The indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will go out See Tow Haul Mode in the Index for more information 2 30 Manual Transmission Operation 5 Speed This is your shift pattern Here s how to operate your manual transmission FIRST 1 Press the clutch pedal and shift into FIRST 1 Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal You can shift into FIRST 1 when you re going less than 20 mph 30 km h If you ve come to a complete stop and it s hard to shift into FIRST 1 put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch Press the clutch pedal back down Then shift into FIRST 1 SECOND 2 Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND 2 Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal THIRD FOURTH AND FIFTH 3 4 and 5 Shift into THIRD 3 FOURTH 4 and FIFTH 5 the same way you do for SECOND 2 Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal To stop let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal Just before the vehicle stops press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal and shift to NEUTRAL NEUTRAL Use this position when you start or idle your engine RE
134. aying a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player 3 14 Once the tape is playing use the VOLUME BAL FADE BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio If an error appears on the display see Cassette Tape Messages later in this section REV Reverse Press this button to reverse the cassette tape Press the FWD button to stop reversing the tape FWD Forward Press this button to advance the cassette tape Press the REV button to stop forwarding the tape RECALL Press this knob to switch tape sides EJECT Press this button to stop a tape when it is playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing Cassette Tape Messages CLN Clean If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player To activate the bypass feature use the following steps 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio on 3 Insert the adapter into the cassette slot 4 Within five seconds press and hold the
135. ays on or comes on when you re driving your vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light isn t on you still have brakes but you don t have anti lock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on you don t have anti lock brakes and there s a problem with your regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light earlier in this section The anti lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 2 91 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage United States Canada This gage shows the engine coolant temperature If the gage pointer moves into the red area your engine is too hot It means that your engine coolant has overheated If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions you should pull off the road stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible See Engine Overheating in the Index for more information 2 92 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Service Engine Soon Light in the United States or Check Engine Light in Canada SERVICE ENGINE SOON United States Canada Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emis
136. bel side up The player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing The display will show the CD symbol If you want to insert a compact disc with the ignition off first press DISP or EJT If an error appears on the display see Compact Disc Messages later in this section 1 PREV Previous Press this pushbutton to go to the previous track if the current track has been playing for less than eight seconds If this pushbutton is pressed and the current track has been playing for more than eight seconds it will go to the beginning of the current track TRACK and the track number will appear on the display If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once the player will continue moving back through the disc The sound will mute while seeking 3 35 2 NEXT Press this pushbutton to go to the next track TRACK and the track number will appear on the display If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once the player will continue moving forward through the disc The sound will mute while seeking 3 REV Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly within a track Press and hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six times the normal playing speed Press and hold it for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the normal playing speed Release it to play the track The display will show ET and the elapsed time 4 FWD Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to advance qu
137. ber about how to load your vehicle The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle Put heavier items as far forward as you can Be sure the load is secured properly so driving on the off road terrain doesn t toss things around 4 16 Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop You or your passengers could be injured Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects Secure the cargo properly Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it more likely to roll over You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads inside the cargo area not on the roof Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible Yow Il find other important information in this manual See Vehicle Loading Luggage Carrier and Tires in the Index Environmental Concerns Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns GM recognizes these concerns and urges every off roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment Always use established trails roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving obey a
138. bol are all you will need for good performance and engine protection When to Change Engine Oil If any one of these is true for you use the short trip city maintenance schedule Most trips are less than 5 miles 8 km This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing Most trips include extensive idling such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle The vehicle is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial application 6 14 Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break down sooner If any one of these is true for your vehicle then you need to change your oil and filter every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever occurs first If none of them is true use the long trip highway maintenance schedule Change the oil and filter every 7 500 miles 12 500 km or 12 months whichever occurs first Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions will cause engine oil to break down slower Remote Oil Filter Four Wheel Drive The access door for the remote oil filter is in the steering linkage shield assembly located under the radiator support Turn the screw to unlock or lock the door If you open the door make sure it is securely closed when you are finished What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unheal
139. but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player To activate the bypass feature use the following steps 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds indicating the feature is active 4 Insert the adapter into the cassette slot It will power up the radio and begin playing This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed 3 24 AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control If Equipped Prey Let mEn Ey mw e 4 H 5 3 i Tehn Fis laa TE N r u es A i G T l oon Se i Playing the Radio PWR Power Press this knob to turn the system on and off VOL Volume Turn this knob clockwise to increase volume Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume The knob is capable of rotating continuously SCV Speed Compensated Volume With SCV your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume c
140. button again A new group of words will appear on the display Once the complete message has been displayed INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received 3 56 TRAF Traffic Press this button to receive traffic announcements The traffic announcement brackets will appear on the display TRAF will appear on the display if the current station broadcasts traffic announcements If the current station does not broadcast traffic announcements the radio will seek to a station that does When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements it will stop If no station is found NONE FOUND will appear on the display When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio station or a related network station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing If the compact disc player was being used the compact disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point where it stopped Playing a Compact Disc If an error appears on the display see Compact Disc Messages later in this section LOAD CD amp Press the LOAD side of this button to load CDs into the compact disc player This compact disc player will hold up to six discs To insert one disc do the following 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CD button 3 Wait for the light located to the right of the slot to turn green 4 Load a disc Insert a disc
141. button on the hand held transmitter Continue to hold both buttons until the indicator light on HomeLink begins to flash rapidly this may take up to 90 seconds If you have trouble programming HomeLink make sure that you have followed the directions exactly as described and that the battery in the hand held transmitter is not weak If you still cannot program it move the hand held transmitter to the left or right or forward or backward or flip it upside down HomeLink may not work with older garage door openers that do not meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards If you cannot program the transmitter after repeated attempts refer to Training a Garage Door Opener with Rolling Codes later in this section or contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com Be sure to keep the original hand held transmitter in case you need to erase and reprogram HomeLink 2 79 Training a Garage Door Opener with Rolling Codes If Equipped If you have not previously programmed the hand held transmitter to HomeLink see Programming the HomeLink Transmitter listed previously If you have completed this programming already you now need to train the garage door opener motor head unit to recognize HomeLink 1 Find the Learn or Smart button on the garage door opener motor head unit The exact location and color will vary by garage door opener brand If you have difficulty find
142. cassette tape with the ignition off press EJECT or RECALL Then insert the cassette tape If the ignition is on but the radio is off the tape will begin playing Once the tape is playing use the VOL BAL FADE BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the display whenever a tape is being played Any time a tape is inserted the top side is selected for play first The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is metal or CrO9 and adjusts for best playback sound If an error appears on the display see Cassette Tape Messages later in this section 1 PREV Previous Press this pushbutton or the left SEEK arrow to search for the previous selection A minimum three second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink while in previous mode 2 PROG Program Press this pushbutton to switch from one side of the tape to the other 3 NEXT Press this pushbutton or the right SEEK arrow to search for the next selection A minimum three second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink while in next mode The sound will mute while searching for the next selection REV 4 Reverse Press this pushbutton to rapidly reverse the tape Press this pushbutton again to stop reversing the tape The radio will play the last selected
143. ce milk soft drinks vomit urine and blood can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain then sponge the soiled area with cool water 2 Ifa stain remains follow the cleaner instructions described earlier 3 If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine treat the area with a water baking soda solution 1 teaspoon 5 ml of baking soda to 1 cup 250 ml of lukewarm water 4 Let dry Stains caused by candy ice cream mayonnaise chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain 2 First clean with cool water and allow to dry completely 3 Ifa stain remains follow the cleaner instructions described earlier Cleaning Vinyl Use warm water and a clean cloth Rub with a clean damp cloth to remove dirt You may have to do it more than once Things like tar asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don t get them off quickly Use a clean cloth and a vinyl leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Cleaning Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth Then let the leather dry naturally Do not use heat to dry For stubborn stains use a leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Never use oils varnishes solvent based or abrasive cleaners furniture polish or shoe polish on leather Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately If dirt
144. ch for the previous selection A minimum three second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink while in previous mode 2 PROG Program Press this pushbutton to switch from one side of the tape to the other 3 NEXT Press this pushbutton or the right SEEK arrow to search for the next selection A minimum three second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink while in next mode The sound will mute while searching for the next selection REV 4 Reverse Press this pushbutton to rapidly reverse the tape Press this pushbutton again to stop reversing the tape The radio will play the last selected station while reversing the tape The tape direction arrow will blink while in reverse mode Dq 5 Dolby Press this pushbutton to reduce cassette tape noise The double D symbol will appear on the display while the player is in this mode Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation FWD 6 Forward Press this pushbutton to rapidly forward the tape Press this pushbutton again to stop forwarding the tape The radio will play the last selected station while forwarding the tape The tape direction arrow will blink while in forward mode AM FM Press th
145. check the fluid hot before adding fluid Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level 6 18 Checking the Fluid Level Prepare your vehicle as follows Park your vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in PARK P With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in PARK P Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps The transmission dipstick handle has Lot A this symbol on it The transmission dipstick is located near the center of the engine compartment See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location 1 Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 2 Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again 3 Ifthe fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 6 19 How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot A cold check is used only as a referenc
146. cheduled Maintenance 67 500 Miles 112 500 km Le Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Continued ee 7 39 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Continued Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehi
147. cle Storage If you re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep your battery from running down Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you aren t careful See Jump Starting in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods Also for your audio system see Theft Deterrent Feature in the Index Bulb Replacement See Replacement Bulbs in the Index for the proper types of bulbs to use For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your GM dealer s service department Halogen Bulbs Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package Headlamps One Piece Composite Headlamp System 1 Open the hood 2 Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up 3 Pull the headlamp assembly out 4 Unplug the electrical connector 6 37 6 38 Turn the bulb socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it Put the new bulb socket assembly into the headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight 7 Plug in the electrical connector 8 Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle
148. cle is not moving Move the lever located under the front of the manual seat up to unlock it Slide the seat to where you want it and release the lever Try to move the seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked into place If your vehicle has this feature there will be a knob on the outboard side of the driver s bucket seat Turn the knob counterclockwise to increase lumbar support and clockwise to decrease lumbar support If your vehicle has this feature there will be a control pad on the outboard side of your seat Horizontal Control Raise or lower the front of the seat by raising or lowering the forward edge of the control Raise or lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering the rear edge of the control Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the whole control toward the front or the rear of the vehicle Moving the whole control up or down raises or lowers the whole seat Vertical Control Move the reclining front seatback forward or rearward by moving the control toward the front or rear of the vehicle Power Lumbar Control If Equipped If your vehicle has this I feature it is located on the outboard side of the seat s Press and hold the front of the control until you have the desired lumbar support To decrease lumbar support press and hold the rear of the control Memory Seat If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature the control located on the outboard side o
149. cle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 82 500 Miles 137 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 40 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly o
150. cludes reading lamps a compartment for a garage door opener a temperature The lamps can also be swiveled to point in the desired and compass display and a storage compartment for direction sunglasses Some models have a driver information system in the console See Driver Information System later in this section 2 64 Installing a Garage Door Opener If you have a garage door opener the front overhead compartment can be used to conveniently store the opener If you have the optional HomeLink Transmitter please see HomeLink Transmitter in the Index for instructions on how to use the system To install the garage door opener first open the compartment door by pressing the latch forward Peel the protective backing from the hook and loop patch Press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener as close to the center of the opener as possible Center the garage door opener activation button over the console door button and press the opener firmly into place The pegs inside the compartment door are used to make sure the button on the compartment door will contact the control button on the garage door opener Add one peg at a time until the garage door opener operates with the compartment door closed when you press the button 2 65 Now with the compartment door closed press the button again to make sure the garage door opener operates properly With the garage door opener posi
151. components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 13 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions Inheavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 14 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 33 000 Miles 55 000 km Le
152. ctions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat General Motors therefore recommends that child restraints be secured in a rear seat outside position including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a forward facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat Never put a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat Here s why 1 46 A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat outside position You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat but before you do always move the front passenger seat as far back as it wil
153. current program Finding RDS Stations To find RDS stations perform the following steps 1 Push the SEEK TYPE button or turn the P TYPE LIST knob to display the program type list 2 Turn the knob either clockwise or counterclockwise to select a program type The list is alphabetical If you select ANY TYPE your radio will seek to the first PTY available 3 Push the SEEK TYPE button to activate search VOL Volume Turn this knob clockwise to increase volume when RDS interrupts regular play Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume DISP Display Press this knob to change what appears on the display while using RDS Pressing this knob will also display an RDS station frequency or program type when the radio is on The display options are station name station frequency PTY and the name of the program if available Pressing and holding this knob will activate the RDS default display Finding a PTY Preset Station P TYPE LIST Program Type Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to select the Program Type PTY you want to listen to SEEK TYPE and a PTY will appear on the display Press the SEEK TYPE button and the radio will seek to the first RDS broadcaster of the selected program type If the radio cannot find the desired program type NONE will appear on the display and the radio will return to the last station you were listening to AM FM Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch t
154. d Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Here are some things you need to know in order to help your vehicle pass an inspection Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or not working properly Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This may take several days of routine driving If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness see your dealer or qualified service center to prepare the vehicle for inspection 2 95 Oil Pressure Gage United States Canada The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi pounds per square inch when the engine is running Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa kilopascals 2 96 Don t keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that i
155. d go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 1 34 The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or a crash The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle 1 35 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults 4 Door Models Four door models have rear shoulder belt comfort guides This feature will provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for small adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide better positions the belt away from the neck and head To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts Here s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt 1 36 Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of the seatback and the interior body to remove the guide from its storage clip 2 Slide the guide under and past the belt The elastic 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat cord must be under the belt Then place the guide The elastic cord mus
156. d hold one of the six pushbuttons The sound will mute When it returns release the pushbutton Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone Bass Treble BASS Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass TREB Treble Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them 3 22 Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL Balance Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player To load a
157. d surface contaminants Spray on wipe off 12377965 16 oz 0 473 L Swirl Remover Polish Removes Swirl marks ne soratehes and OWE light surface contamination 12377966 16 oz 0 473 L Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish Foaming Tire Cleans shines and protects in one easy step 1238198 19 02 OAT Shine Low Gloss No wiping necessary Medium foaming shampoo Cleans and lightly waxes 12578401 16 oz 0 473 L Wash Wax Concentrate Biodegradable and phosphate free 12378488 8 oz 0 237 L Spot Lifter Quickly and easily removes spots and stains from carpets vinyl and cloth upholstery See your General Motors parts department for these products See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 6 63 Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UX1M072675 a This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver s side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration 6 64 Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code This code will help you identify your engine specifications and replacement parts Service Parts Identification Label You ll find this label on the inside of the glove box It s very helpful if you ever need to or
158. d the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 1 49 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 1 50 5 To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint If you re using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Center Seat Positions 4 Door Models Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Ltn li I i i N i Don t use child restraints in these positions The restraints won t work properly 1 51 Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag Never You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part put a rear facing child restraint in this seat Here s why about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Becau
159. d to make the most of available tire and road conditions This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember Anti lock doesn t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you won t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have anti lock brakes Using Anti Lock Don t pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may feel the brakes vibrate or you may notice some noise but this is normal Braking in Emergencies With anti lock you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort 4 10 Steering Tips Driving on Curves It s important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here s why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires aga
160. de the spare in the tire rotation 5 34 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare tire is a temporary replacement tire made to perform at speeds up to 65 mph 105 km h and for distances up to 3 000 miles 5 000 km With the compact spare installed you can finish your trip and then have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced Of course it s best to repair or replace the damaged road tire as soon as you can Your compact spare tire will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again The compact spare may lose air after a time so check the inflation pressure regularly After installing the compact spare on your vehicle stop as soon as possible and make sure it s correctly inflated It should be 60 psi 420 kPa Don t use your compact spare on other vehicles and don t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires they won t fit Keep your compact spare and its wheel together Don t include the compact spare in your tire rotation NOTICE When the compact spare is installed don t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails The compact spare can get caught on the rails That can damage the tire and wheel and maybe other parts of your vehicle Tire chains won t fit your compact spare Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too Don t use tire chains on your compact spare If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice o
161. der is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneuver Not necessarily Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head on collision So here are some tips for passing Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates it s all right to pass providi
162. der parts On this label is your VIN the model designation paint information and e a list of all production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment NOTICE Don t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn t be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index Headlamps The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit breaker An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off or in some cases to remain off If this happens have your headlamp wiring checked right away Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem be sure to get it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed
163. djust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed The radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the level display in the middle position 3 44 Using RDS Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System RDS RDS is a system that receives data along with the audio of the FM station you are currently tuned to You can use RDS to display program information and to control your radio With RDS the radio can do the following Seek only to stations with the types of programs you want to listen to seek to stations with traffic announcements receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies and receive and display messages from radio stations RDS features are only available on FM stations that broadcast RDS information The RDS features of your radio rely on receiving specific RDS information from these stations These features will only work when the RDS information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station When you are tuned to an RDS station the station name will appear on the display instead of the frequency Most RDS stations provide their station name the time of day and a Program Type PTY for their current programming Some stations also provide the name of the
164. ds a chime will sound or turn the ignition to OFF and then to RUN again As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it 2 57 Fog Lamps If Equipped Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions Your parking lamps must be on for your fog lamps to work The fog lamp button is located on the instrument panel near the lamp control Press the button to turn the fog lamps on Press the button again to turn them off A light will glow in the button when the fog lamps are on Fog lamps will go off whenever your high beam headlamps come on When the high beams go off the fog lamps will come on again 2 58 Interior Lamps Instrument Panel Brightness Thumbwheel This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights The thumbwheel for this feature is located on the driver s side of the instrument panel next to the exterior lamps control Turn the thumbwheel up to make your instrument panel lights brighter Turn the thumbwheel all the way up to turn on the interior lamps To dim the instrument panel lights turn the thumbwheel down Illuminated Entry Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry feature When a door is opened the dome lamps will come on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position When the doors are closed or the front door handles are lifted and released the lamps will stay on for a short period of time and
165. e If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check It doesn t take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Don t overfill NOTICE We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON IIL because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transmission Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 6 20 Manual Transmission Fluid When to Check A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is changed However the fluid in your manual transmission doesn t require changing How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at your GM dealership service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading NOTICE Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Check the
166. e a collision If you need to turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving turn the key only to OFF Don t press the key release button while the vehicle is moving B LOCK This position locks your ignition steering wheel and transmission It s a theft deterrent feature You will only be able to remove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK NOTICE If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can t turn it be sure you are using the correct key if so is it all the way in If it is then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard Turn the key only with your hand Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch If none of this works then your vehicle needs service C OFF This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off for example if your vehicle is being towed D RUN This is the position for driving E START This position starts your engine 2 21 Key Release Button The key cannot be removed from the ignition of manual transmission vehicles unless the key release button is used To remove the key on manual transmission vehicles turn the key to OFF Then turn the key to LOCK while pressing the key release button down at the same time Pull the key straight out On automatic transmission vehicles turn the key to LOCK and pull it straight ou
167. e current station does not The traffic symbol will flash on the display when seeking for a station that supports traffic interrupt When the traffic interrupt feature is on TRAF will appear on the display When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing The traffic symbol and TRAFFIC will appear on the display while the traffic announcement plays If the cassette tape or compact disc player was being used the tape or compact disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point where it stopped Radio Messages CAL ERR Calibration Error This message is displayed when the radio has not been calibrated properly for the vehicle You must return to the dealership for service LOCKED This message is displayed when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up You must return to the dealership for service Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player The longer side with the tape visible should face to the right If the ignition is on but the radio is off the tape can be inserted and will begin playing A tape symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is inserted If you hear nothing but a garbled sound the tape may not be in squarely Press EJT to remove the tape and star
168. e fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 100 000 Miles 166 000 km An Emission Control Service MILEAGE SERVIC Replace spark plugs Oooo o oo y O An Emission Control Service If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter Manual transmission fluid doesn t require change Automatic Transfer Case Only Change transfer case fluid Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV valve An Emission Control Service 7 29 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what MILEAGE i to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck a e E Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service 7 30 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be repeated after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals for the life of this vehicle The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be repeated at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km for th
169. e inside by passengers signal multifunction lever all the way toward you The security lock lever is and hold it while you perform the next step located on the inside edge 2 Turn your key to RUN and OFF twice Then with of each rear door the key in OFF release the turn signal multifunction lever Once you do this you will hear the lock switch lock and unlock To use the security locks do the following locks Select one of the previous four programming options and follow the instructions You will have 30 seconds to begin programming If you exceed the 30 second limit the locks will automatically lock and unlock to indicate you have left the program n iit 3 You are now ready to program the automatic door ae mode If this occurs repeat the procedure beginning 1 Open one of the rear doors with Step 1 You can exit the program mode any 2 Slide the lever up to the lock symbol to engage the time by turning the ignition to RUN the locks will lock or slide the lever down to the unlock symbol to automatically lock and unlock to indicate you are disengage the lock leaving the program mode If the lock unlock switches are not pressed while in the programming 3 Close the door mode the auto lock unlock setting will not 4 Repeat these steps on the opposite rear door be modified If the security locks are engaged the rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened form the inside If you want to open a rear door when a
170. e life of this vehicle See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following Footnotes The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded Lubricate the front suspension ball joints steering linkage parking brake cable guides propshaft splines universal joints and brake pedal springs A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule Drive axle service See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for proper lubricant to use Check fluid level and add fluid as needed Ifyour vehicle has a locking differential drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change 7 31 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 7 500 Miles 12 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote R
171. e may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle s headlamps do not flash the vehicle should be serviced by an authorized service center Passlock Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock theft deterrent system Passlock is a passive theft deterrent system Passlock enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a valid key If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with fuel is disabled During normal operation the SECURITY light will go off approximately five seconds after the key is turned to RUN If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes wait about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before trying to restart the engine Remember to release the key from START as soon as the engine starts If the engine does not start after three tries the vehicle needs service If the engine is running and the SECURITY message comes on you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine off However your Passlock system is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time You may also want to check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index See your dealer for service In an emergency call the GM Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance in the Index 2 19 New Vehicle Break In
172. e part of this manual called Children There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the air bag symbol The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Air Bag Readiness Light in the Index for more information How the Air Bag System Works Where are the air bags The driver s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 25 If something is between an occupant and an air bag the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear Don t put anything between an occupant and an air bag and don t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering The right front passenger s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side 1 26 When should an air bag inflate An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system s designed threshold level If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn t move or deform the threshold level is about 9 to 16 mph 14 to 26 km h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range If your vehicle st
173. e received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Programming the HomeLink Transmitter Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door you are programming It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio frequency Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the transmitter Follow these steps to program up to three channels 1 Decide which one of the three channels one of the HomeLink buttons you want to program 2 Press and hold the desired button on HomeLink through Step 3 3 When the HomeLink indicator light begins to blink slowly this may take up to 30 seconds hold the hand held transmitter about to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from HomeLink and then press and hold the transmit
174. e someone pick up and store the chocks 4 62 Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you re pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid don t overfill engine oil axle lubricant belt cooling system and brake system Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Trailer Wiring Harness The light duty trailer wiring is a six wire harness assembly The optional heavy duty trailer wiring is an eight wire harness assembly The harnesses are stored under the vehicle along the passenger side frame crossmember on two door vehicles or on the driver s side corner frame rear crossmember on four door vehicles The heavy duty trailer wiring is fused in the engine compartment fuse block See Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index Both harnesses have no connector and should be wired by a qualified electrical technician The technician can use the following color code chart when connecting the wiring harness to your trailer Dark Blue Use for electric trailer brakes or auxiliary wiring eight wire harness only Red Use for battery charging it connects to the starter
175. e the battery has enough water You don t need to add water to the ACDelco battery or batteries installed in every new GM vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you don t explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Don t get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 Check that the jumper cables don t have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Don t connect positive to negative or you ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And don t connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal i
176. e the dipstick with a clean rag Replace the cap and completely tighten it Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the proper range 6 30 What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located toward NOTICE the front of the engine compartment on the driver s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in When using concentrated washer fluid the Index for more information on location follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Open the cap with the Don t mix water with ready to use washer washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water doesn t clean as well as washer fluid Fill your
177. e the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down Pull the BRAKE RELEASE lever fully It is located on the bottom of the driver s side of the instrument panel 2 40 Shifting Into PARK P Automatic Transmission Only It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground use the steps that follow With four wheel drive your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL See Four Wheel Drive Automatic Transfer Case in the Index Always put the shift lever fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index Column Shift Lever 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P like this Pull the lever toward you 2 41 Console Shift Lever 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P position like this Move the lever up as far as it will go 3 Turn the ignition key to LOCK 4 Re
178. ear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 7 26 Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index fo
179. eble equalization settings designed for country western jazz talk pop rock and classical stations Each time you press the AUTO TONE button this feature will switch to one of these program types To return the bass and treble to the manual mode either press and release the AUTO TONE button until the display goes blank or press and release the BASS or TREB knobs and turn them until the display goes blank Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL Balance Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Compact Disc Insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in Wait a few seconds and the disc should play CD and a CD symbol will also appear on the display Anytime you are playing a CD the letters CD will be next to the CD symbol If an error appears on the display see Compact Disc Messages later in this section 1 PREV Previous Press this pushbutton to search for the previous track If you hold this pushbut
180. ecome slightly bent you can straighten it out by hand If the mast is badly bent as it might be by vandals you should replace it Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the fender If tightening is required tighten by hand then with a wrench one quarter turn Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Here you ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions We ve also included many other useful tips on driving 4 2 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle 4 30 Driving at Night 4 3 Defensive Driving 4 32 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4 4 Drunken Driving 4 35 City Driving 4 7 Control of a Vehicle 4 36 Freeway Driving 4 7 Braking 4 37 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 4 10 Steering 4 38 Highway Hypnosis 4 12 Off Road Recovery 4 38 Hill and Mountain Roads 4 13 Passing 4 40 Winter Driving 4 14 Loss of Control 4 43 Recreational Vehicle Towing 4 15 Off Road Driving with Your 4 47 Loading Your Vehicle Four Wheel Drive Vehicle 4 50 Towing a Trailer Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle Whenever we drive we re taking on an important responsibility This is true for any motor vehicle passenger car van truck or sport utility Driver behavior the driving environment and the vehicle s design all affect how well a vehicle performs But statistics show that the most important factor by far is how we drive Knowing how these three factors wo
181. ecommend the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for service To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing your emission control system to work properly You should not have to add anything to your fuel Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier NOTICE Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Don t use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage wouldn t be covered under your warranty Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel may be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn t be covered by your warranty To check on fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a ma
182. ehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero To view the trip odometer press the button near the readout To reset the trip odometer hold the button until it resets 2 86 Tachometer If Equipped The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm NOTICE On vehicles with a manual transmission if you operate the engine with the tachometer in the shaded warning areas your vehicle s engine or other parts of your vehicle could be damaged Damage to your engine or vehicle caused by operating the engine with the tachometer in the shaded warning areas isn t covered by your vehicle warranty Don t operate the tachometer in the shaded warning areas Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle The pictures will help you locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they re working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can
183. elected for play first Primary Radio Controls The following functions are controlled by the main radio 1 PREV Previous Press this pushbutton or the left SEEK arrow in the opposite direction that the lighted tape direction arrow points to search for the previous selection A minimum three second blank gap is needed for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation and the sound is muted in this mode 3 NEXT Press this pushbutton or the right SEEK arrow in the direction that the lighted tape direction arrow points to search for the next selection The tape direction arrow will blink during SEEK operation and the sound is muted in this mode REV 4 Reverse Press this pushbutton to rapidly reverse the tape The tape will rapidly reverse to the beginning of the cassette or until you press this pushbutton again The radio plays the last selected station during reverse operation 5D Press this pushbutton to turn Dolby NR on and off Dolby NR is active when a tape is inserted in the remote cassette The double D symbol will appear on the display Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation FWD 6 Forward Press this pushbutton to rapidly advance the tape The tape will rapidly advance to the end of the cassette
184. em is apparent which may prevent serious damage to the vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing a malfunction 2 97 Tow Haul Mode Light If Equipped This light should come on when the tow haul mode has been selected TOW HAUL For more information see Tow Haul Mode in the Index 2 98 Check Gages Light The CHECK GAGES light will come on briefly when you are starting the engine CHECK GAGES If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones Gate Ajar Light If this light comes on your endgate or liftglass is ajar Try closing the endgate or liftglass again Never drive with the endgate or liftglass even partially open GATE AJAR Fuel Gage Here are four things that some owners ask about None of these show a problem with your fuel gage At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads full M 1 2 S It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the K gage indicated For example the gage may have UNLEADED BD indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up United States Canada The gage doesn t go back to empty when you turn ee off the ignition When
185. en get fresh air by opening a window or door 1 28 Air bags are designed to inflate only once After they inflate you ll need some new parts for your air bag system If you don t get them the air bag system won t be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module which records information about the air bag system The module records information about the readiness of the system when the system commands air bag inflation and driver s safety belt usage at deployment Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system Improper service can mean that your air bag system won t work properly See your dealer for service NOTICE If you damage the covering for the driver s or the right front passenger s air bag the bag may not work properly You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s air bag Do not open or break the air bag coverings Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle You don t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle Your dealer and the service man
186. en if your shift lever is in PARK P if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL See Four Wheel Drive Automatic Transfer Case in the Index Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won t move See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index Locking Rear Axle If your vehicle has this feature your locking rear axle can give you additional traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle Horn To sound the horn press the horn symbol on the steering wheel pad Tilt Wheel If Equipped A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive If you have the tilt steering wheel you can raise it to the highest level to allow more room for the driver to enter and exit the vehicle The tilt lever is located on the driver s side of the steering column under the turn signal lever To tilt hold the steering wheel and pull the tilt lever toward you Move the wheel to a comfortable level then release the tilt lever to lock the wheel in place Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving 2 47 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering colum
187. equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you re driving Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch If you do then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch If you don t seal them deadly carbon monoxide CO from your exhaust can get into your vehicle See Carbon Monoxide in the Index Dirt and water can too Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer Follow the manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 450 kg loaded then it needs its own brakes and they must be adequate Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you ll be able to install adjust and maintain them properly Your trailer s brake system can tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system only if The trailer parts can withstand 3 000 psi 20 650 kPa of pressure The trailer s brake system
188. er child for whom the safety belts are designed A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that s unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints Restraint Systems for Children An infant car bed A a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface Make sure that the infant s head rests toward the center of the vehicle 1 43 A rear facing infant seat B provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant The harness system holds the infant in place and in a crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint 1 44 A forward facing child seat C E provides restraint for the child s body with the harness and also sometimes with surfaces such as T shaped or shelf like shields Q How do child restraints work A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain seat or position children A built in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle An add on child restraint system is a portable one which is purchased by
189. er vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray gt Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires in the Index City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving Know the best way to get to where you are going Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You ll save time and energy See the next part Freeway Driving Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns green and just before you start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light 4 35 Freeway Driving Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow Treat the left la
190. ere with FM signals causing the sound to come and go Tips About Your Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable NOTICE until it is too late Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound Sound that seems normal can be loud Before you add any sound equipment to your and harmful to your hearing Take precautions by vehicle like a tape player CB radio mobile adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe telephone or two way radio be sure you can sound level before your hearing adapts to it add what you want If you can it s very important to do it properly Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine Delphi Electronics radio or 2 Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably other systems and even damage them Your and clearly vehicle s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly To help avoid hearing loss or damage do the following 1 Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting So before adding sound equipment check with your dealer and be sure to check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units 3 75 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants direct sunlight and extreme heat If t
191. error cannot be corrected contact your dealer 3 70 Theft Deterrent Feature If Equipped THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your radio It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored If ignored the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature If THEFTLOCK is activated your radio will not operate if stolen When THEFTLOCK is activated the radio will display LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power has been interrupted If your battery loses power for any reason you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate Activating the Theft Deterrent Feature The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between any steps the radio automatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4 1 Write down any three or four digit number from 000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from the vehicle 2 Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN 3 Turn the radio off 4 Press the 1 and 4 pushbuttons at the same time Hold them down until shows on the display Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down Press M
192. esigned to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You ll know how fast you re going about how much fuel you ve used and many other things you lI need to know to drive safely and economically 20 ee 100 APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT FROM PARK Base Level cluster with Automatic Transmission United States Canada cluster similar 2 84 SERVICE ENGINE GATE SOON S5 S 1 0 RPM X 1000 APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT FROM PARK PIRIN DISH S amp S pm UNLEADED FUEL ONLY ODO TRIP HOLD TO RESET WOH 888888 TRIP wa fD 9 19 VOLTS Uplevel cluster with Automatic Transmission United States Canada cluster similar 2 85 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or kilometers used in Canada The odometer mileage can be checked without the vehicle running Simply press the trip odometer button You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer then it must be But if it can t then it s set at zero and a label must be put on the driver s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far your v
193. ess AM FM to select AM FM1 or FM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press SET SET will appear on the display 5 Press one of the four pushbuttons within five seconds Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton In addition to the four stations already set up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time and by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on Press AM FM to select the band Tune in the desired station Press SET SET will appear on the display Be ee Press two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time within five seconds Whenever you press the same two pushbuttons the station you set will return 6 Repeat the steps for each adjoining pushbuttons 3 13 Setting the Tone Bass Treble BASS Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease bass TREB Treble Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL Balance Turn the control ring behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Turn the control ring behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Pl
194. et specifications which were developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection Gasolines meeting these specifications could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasolines In Canada look for the Auto Makers Choice label on the pump Canada Only California Fuel If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards see the underhood emission control label it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on see Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index and your vehicle may fail a smog check test If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs may not be covered by your warranty Additives Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT General Motors does not r
195. ever occurs first An Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 33 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for pr
196. ex for further details 7 44 Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant in the Index for further details Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary See Windshield Washer Fluid in the Index for further details At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures Don t forget to check your spare tire See Tires in the Index for further details Cassette Deck Service Clean cassette deck Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play See Audio Systems in the Index for further details At Least Twice a Year Restraint System Check Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield
197. f the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions including rollovers rear impacts and many side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward those air bags Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions 1 27 What will you see after an air bag inflates After an air bag inflates it quickly deflates so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated Some components of the air bag module the steering wheel hub for the driver s air bag or the instrument panel for the right front passenger s bag will be hot for a short time The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bags Air bag inflation doesn t prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle When an air bag inflates there is dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but can t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates th
198. f the SET driver s seat looks like this Use this memory function to save your seat cushion and seatback settings by using the following procedure 1 Adjust the driver s seat to a safe and comfortable driving position 2 Press the SET button and then press and hold button 1 for driver 1 for three seconds A chime will sound to let you know that the position has been stored A second seating and mirror position can be programmed by repeating the procedure with a second driver and pressing button 2 for three seconds Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while the vehicle is in PARK P the memory position will be recalled Each time a memory button is pressed a single chime will sound 3 To program your keyless entry transmitter if equipped press the UNLOCK button within five seconds of programming the memory button You will hear a chime to confirm programming of the transmitter When your vehicle is in PARK P for an automatic transmission or the parking brake is engaged for a manual transmission press and release the numbered memory button you just stored The seat will move to the set position You will hear one chime Pressing the UNLOCK button of a keyless entry transmitter will adjust the seat to the corresponding stored memory position You will hear one chime Repeat Steps and 2 to readjust the seat The transmitter need not be reprogrammed unless it needs to correspond to the other
199. f the vehicle has one Don t let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Now connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the good battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Don t let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable doesn t go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery Connect the other end of the negative cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move The electrical connection is just as good there and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less 10 Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for awhile 11 Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery If it won t start after a few tries it probably needs service NOTICE Damage to your vehicle may result from electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed incorrectly To prevent electrical shorting take care that they don t touch each other or any other metal The repairs wouldn t be covered by Jumper Cable Removal your warranty A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part B Good Battery C Dead Battery To disconnect the jum
200. ff road use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information 4 29 Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue 4 30 Here are some tips on night driving Drive defensively Don t drink and drive Except Vehicles with Electrochromic Day Night Inside Rearview Mirror Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you Since you can t see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead In remote areas watch for animals If you re tired pull off the road in a safe place and rest No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision For example if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you re driving don t wear sunglasses at night They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible You c
201. formation If the current station has a message the information icon will appear on the display These text messages are from the RDS broadcaster to the listening public and may be general information such as artist and song title call in phone numbers etc Press this button to see the message If the whole message does not appear on the display parts of the message will appear every three seconds until the message is completed To scroll through the message at your own speed press the INFO button again for less than one second A new group of words will appear on the display Once the complete message has been displayed the information icon will 3 46 disappear from the display until another new message is received The old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button until a new message is received or a different station is tuned to TRAF Traffic Press this button to receive traffic announcements If the current station does not broadcast traffic announcements the radio will seek to a station that does The traffic symbol will flash on the display When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements it will stop If no station is found NO TRAF will appear on the display Your radio can be programmed to interrupt the playback of a cassette tape CD or FM radio by enabling the traffic interrupt feature Press the TRAF button once to seek to an RDS station that supports the traffic interrupt feature if th
202. forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that doesn t get you out after a few tries you may need to be towed out Or you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has them If you do need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle in the Index 5 36 Using the Recovery Hooks Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks The hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle You may need to use them if you re stuck off road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving These hooks when used are under a lot of force Always pull the vehicle straight out Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back NOTICE Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty 5 37 Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle This section begins with service and fuel information and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels There is also technical information about your vehicle and a part devoted to its appearance care 6 2 Service 6 32 6 3 Fuel 6 36 6 5 Fuels in Foreign Countries 6 37 6 6 Filling Your Tank 6 42 6 8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 6 45 6 8 Checking Things Under the Hood 6 55 6 11 Engine
203. fter following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you should file with the GM BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1804 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers w
204. g with all four wheels on the ground should be avoided 4 44 In rare cases when it s unavoidable and your vehicle must be towed with all four wheels on the ground the propeller shaft to axle yoke orientation should be marked and the propeller shaft removed following the applicable service manual removal installation procedure See Service and Owner Publications in the Index Dust or dirt can enter the back of the transmission through the opening created by removing the propeller shaft if proper protection is not provided Also check the transmission fluid level before driving the vehicle When towing your vehicle turn the ignition to OFF To prevent your battery from draining while towing remove the RDO BATT and CLSTR fuses from the instrument panel fuse block Be sure to replace the fuse when you reach your destination See Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed for recreational vehicle towing Follow the instructions for the towing equipment Shifting a four wheel drive vehicle s transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in Park P for an automatic transmission or if your vehicle is in gear for a manual transmission You or others could be injured Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL If your vehicle has four wheel drive it cannot be dinghy towed A fo
205. gine compartment on the driver s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on the location of the engine air cleaner filter NOTICE To check or replace the engine air cleaner filter do i the following If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into your engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you re driving 1 Remove the fasteners that hold the cover on and remove the cover 2 Lift out the engine air cleaner filter 6 16 Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change both the fluid and filter every 15 000 miles 25 000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions Jn heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance Services in How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department If you do it yourself be su
206. hat does The traffic symbol will flash on the display When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements it will stop If no station is found NO TRAF will appear on the display Your radio can be programmed to interrupt the playback of a CD or FM station by enabling the traffic interrupt feature Press the TRAF button once to seek to an RDS station that supports the traffic interrupt feature if the current station does not The traffic symbol will flash on the display when seeking for a station that supports traffic interrupt When the traffic interrupt feature is on TRAF will appear on the display When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing The traffic symbol and TRAFFIC will appear on the display while the traffic announcement plays If the compact disc player was being used the compact disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point where it stopped Radio Messages CAL ERR Calibration Error This message is displayed when the radio has not been calibrated properly for the vehicle You must return to the dealership for service LOCKED This message is displayed when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up You must return to the dealership for service If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected contact your dealer Playing a Compact Disc Insert a disc partway into the slot la
207. hat your radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and must be returned to the dealership for service LOC Locked This message is displayed when the Theftlock system has locked up Your vehicle must be returned to the dealership for service 3 12 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player If Equipped BELES Be aj Prete 0 A L TPA PA L i y F A samai 3 Playing the Radio Power Turn the VOLUME knob to turn the system on and off VOLUME Turn this knob clockwise to increase volume Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume RECALL Press this knob to display the station being played or to display the clock Clock display is available with the ignition turned off Finding a Station AM FM Press this knob to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 TUNE Turn this knob to tune in radio stations lt SEEK pP Press the right or left arrow to seek to the next or previous station and stay there To scan preset stations press both SEEK buttons The radio will go to the first preset station stored on the pushbutton play for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station Press either SEEK button or RECALL to stop scanning through the preset stations Setting Preset Stations The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 21 stations seven AM seven FM1 and seven FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Pr
208. he exterior lamps control all the way up to the top position In this position the dome lamps will remain on until they are turned off You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button located below the exterior lamp control to set the dome lamps to come on automatically when a door is opened or to remain off To turn the lamps off press the button in With the button in the dome lamps will remain off when a door is open To return the lamps to automatic operation press the button again and return it to the out position With the button in this position the dome lamps will come on when you open a door This will override the illuminated entry feature unless you use your keyless entry transmitter if equipped to unlock the vehicle 2 59 Battery Run Down Protection This feature shuts off the dome courtesy vanity reading glove box and underhood lamps if they are left on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition is off This will keep your battery from running down If the battery run down protection shuts off the interior lamps it may be necessary to do one of the following to return to normal operation Shut off all lamps and close all doors or turn the ignition key to RUN 2 60 Mirrors Inside Day Night Rearview Mirror Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare from headlamps behind you after dark Push the tab away from you for normal daytime operation Electrochromic Day Night Inside Rearview
209. he manual transmission in cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission FIRST 1 and turn off the engine Leave the is in PARK P or if you have the manual vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill transmission even if you re in gear This is side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would because the NEUTRAL position on the transfer take if it rolled downhill Do not shift the transfer case overrides the transmission You or someone case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle else could be injured If you are going to leave Leave it in some gear your vehicle set the parking brake and shift the transmission to PARK P or put your manual transmission in FIRST 1 But do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL Leave the transfer case in a drive gear 4 23 Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill you ll want to consider a number of things How steep is the downhill Will I be able to maintain Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause vehicle control your brakes to overheat and fade This could cause loss of control and a serious accident Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control What s the surface like Smooth Rough Slippery Hard packed dirt Gravel Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts Logs Boulders What s at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large r
210. he station frequency then go on to the next preset station This feature will only scan the six presets that are in the selected band Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning presets The channel number P1 P6 will appear momentarily just before the frequency is displayed The radio will scan preset stations with a strong signal only 3 10 Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select AM FM1 or FM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone Bass Treble AUDIO To adjust the bass press and release AUDIO repeatedly until BAS appears on the display Then press and hold the up arrow to increase bass B and a positive number will appear on the display Press and hold the down arrow to decrease bass B and a negative number will appear on the display B and a zero will appear on the display when the bass level is adjusted to the middle position Release the up or down arrow when you find the bass level you want or when the maximum or minimum level is reached To adjust the treble press and release AUDIO until TRE appears on the d
211. heel drive you shouldn t drive off road unless you re on a level solid surface Off road driving can be great fun But it does have some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself Off roading means you ve left the great North American road system behind Traffic lanes aren t marked Curves aren t banked There are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough uphill or downhill In short you ve gone right back to nature Off road driving involves some new skills And that s why it s very important that you read this guide You Il find many driving tips and suggestions These will help make your off road driving safer and more enjoyable 4 15 Before You Go Off Roading There are some things to do before you go out For example be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done Check to make sure all underbody shields if so equipped are properly attached Be sure you read all the information about your four wheel drive vehicle in this manual Is there enough fuel Is the spare tire fully inflated Are the fluid levels up where they should be What are the local laws that apply to off roading where you ll be driving If you don t know you should check with law enforcement people in the area Will you be on someone s private land If so be sure to get the necessary permission Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving There are some important things to remem
212. hey aren t they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use Your radio may display CLN to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer If this message appears on the display your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player If you notice a reduction in sound quality try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality clean the tape player The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealer GM Part No 12344789 3 76 When cleaning the cassette tape player with the recommended non abrasive cleaning cassette it is possible that the cassette may eject because the cut tape detection feature on your radio may recognize it as a broken tape To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected use the following steps If your vehicle is equipped with the AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player do the following 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio on 3
213. hicle license tape or decals across the defogger grid on the rear window NOTICE Don t use a razor blade or something else sharp on the inside of the rear window If you do you could cut or damage the warming grid and the repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty Ventilation System For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed use vent mode to direct outside air through your vehicle Airflow is through the instrument panel outlets Your vehicle s ventilation system supplies outside air to the inside of your vehicle when it is moving When the vehicle is not moving you can get outside air to flow through by selecting any mode except max A C and any fan speed You will find air outlets in the center and on the sides of your instrument panel You can direct the airflow side to side by turning the thumbwheel located in the center of the vent The vent can be tilted up and down also To control the amount of airflow through the outlets turn the thumbwheel below the vent Ventilation Tips Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice snow or any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and defroster will work far better reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows When you enter a vehicle in cold weather move the fan knob to high for a few moments before driving off This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces the chance of fogging
214. hift lever button on the shift lever If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can t shift out of PARK P try this 1 Turn the key to OFF 2 Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4 3 Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL N 4 Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want 5 Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible 2 44 Parking Your Vehicle Manual Transmission Models Only Before you get out of your vehicle move the shift lever into REVERSE R and firmly apply the parking brake Once the shift lever has been placed into REVERSE R with the clutch pedal pressed in you can turn the ignition key to OFF remove the key and release the clutch If you are parking on a hill or if your vehicle is pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you can t see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if Your exhaust system sounds strange or different Your vehicle gets rusty underneath Your vehicle was damaged in a collision Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs weren t done correctly Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle Things that can burn could touch hot exhau
215. hift lever in PARK P or FIRST 1 for vehicles with manual transmission Release the parking brake prior to towing Shifting Out of NEUTRAL To shift out of NEUTRAL 1 Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal Start the vehicle with the transmission in PARK P or FIRST 1 for vehicles with manual transmission Press the button for the desired transfer case position 2HI 4HI AUTO 4WD or 4LO Put the transmission in NEUTRAL N or press the clutch pedal for vehicles with manual transmission Shift the transmission lever to the desired position After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL the NEUTRAL light will go out Are engagement sound is normal when shifting out of NEUTRAL 2 39 Parking Brake The parking brake is located near the bottom of the instrument panel on the driver s side of the vehicle To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot If the ignition is on the brake BRAKE RELEASE system warning light will come on TE NOTICE Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat You may have to replace them and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill see Towing a Trailer in the Index That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving To releas
216. ho are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs GMC has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with GMC by dialing 1 800 GMC 8583 462 8583 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices GMC encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance If a U S customer wishes to write to GMC the letter should be addressed to GMC s Customer Assistance Center United States Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 1 800 GMC 8583 462 8583 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Fax Number 313 381 0022 Canada General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 All Overseas Locations Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Me
217. how the actual level Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level 6 11 When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the ADD line then you ll need to add at least one quart of oil But you must use the right kind This part explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications in the Index NOTICE Don t add too much oil If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range your engine could be damaged The engine oil fill cap is located in the engine compartment toward the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on the location of the engine oil fill cap Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you re through 6 12 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the starburst symbol This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Do not use any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol If you change your own oil be sure you use oil that has the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container If you ha
218. ice 1 9 To return the head restraints to the upright position reach behind the seats and pull the head restraint up until it locks into position On two door models with an inside mounted spare tire the driver s side rear seat head restraint must be lifted and held upright as the seatback is raised Otherwise the head restraint will hit the spare tire and prevent the seatback from properly latching Push and pull on the head restraints to check that they have locked in the upright position If they haven t see your dealer for service 1 10 Safety Belts They re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts And it explains the air bag system Don t let anyone ride where he or she can t wear a safety belt properly If you are in a crash and you re not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is n
219. ickly within a track Press and hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six times the normal playing speed Press and hold it for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the normal playing speed Release it to play the track The display will show ET and the elapsed time 6 RDM Random Press this pushbutton to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order RDM ON will appear on the display RDM T and the track number will appear on the display when each track starts to play Press RDM again to turn off random play RDM OFF will appear on the display 3 36 lt q SEEK P Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current or previous track Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track If either of the arrows is held or pressed more then once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD DISP Display Press this knob to see how long the current track has been playing ET and the elapsed time will appear on the display To change what is normally shown on the display track or elapsed time press the knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob for two seconds The radio will produce one beep AM FM Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The CD will stop but remain in the player CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio The inactive CD will remain safely inside the radio for futu
220. idden by bushes grass or shrubs Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill Is there a constant incline or does the hill get sharply steeper in places Is there good traction on the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you won t have to make turning maneuvers Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path boulders trees logs or ruts What s beyond the hill Is there a cliff an embankment a drop off a fence Get out and walk the hill if you don t know It s the smart way to find out Is the hill simply too rough Steep hills often have ruts gullies troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion Driving Uphill Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill you need to take some special steps Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed Don t use more power than you need because you don t want your wheels to start spinning or sliding Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible If the path twists and turns you might want to find another route Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous You could lose traction slide sideways and possibly roll over You could be seriously injured or killed When driving up hills always try to go straight up
221. iddle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Turn the control ring behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers AM FM Stereo Playing the Radio PWR Power Press this knob to turn the system on and off VOL Volume Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume RCL Recall Pressing this knob will display the station being played or it will display the clock Clock display is available with the ignition turned off Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE Turn this knob to tune in radio stations lt SEEK SEEK D Press the right or left arrow to seek to the next or previous station and stay there The radio will seek to stations with a strong signal only To scan stations press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds until you hear a beep The radio will go to a station play for a few seconds and flash the station frequency then go on to the next station Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning The radio will scan to stations with a strong signal only To scan preset stations press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for more than four seconds until you hear two beeps The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons play for a few seconds and flash t
222. if your parking brake doesn t release fully If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released it means you have a brake problem Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part isn t working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on there could be a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away OW OM BRAKE Canada United States This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If it doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push Or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle in the Index Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light With the anti lock brake system this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds That s normal If the light st
223. in to play automatically As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display 3 57 Playing a Specific Loaded Compact Disc For every CD loaded a number will appear on the radio display To play a specific CD first press the CD AUX button to start playing a CD Then press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to play A small bar will appear under the CD number that is playing and the track number will appear If an error appears on the radio display see Compact Disc Messages later in this section LOAD CD amp Eject The CD eject side of this button will eject a disc or discs if you have multiple discs loaded To eject a disc or discs from the disc player perform one of the following steps Press and release the CD eject side of the LOAD CD button to eject the disc that is currently playing or to eject all of the discs press the CD eject side of the LOAD CD button for two seconds you will hear a beep and the light will flash to let you know when a disc is being ejected When the CD eject side of the LOAD CD button is pressed the receiver will eject the disc and REMOVE CD will be displayed You can now remove the disc 3 58 If the disc is not removed after 25 seconds the disc will be automatically pulled back into the receiver If you try to push the disc back into the receiver before the 25 second time period is complete the receiver will sense a
224. in to stop scanning SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner is in the preset scan mode The channel number P1 through P6 will appear with the frequency In FM mode this function will scan through the current band such as FM1 or FM2 The radio will scan to stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while scanning Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select AM FM1 or FM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and treble equalization that best suits the type of station you are listening to 5 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons The radio will produce one beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return and the bass and treble equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone Bass Treble AUDIO Press and release the AUDIO knob until BASS or TREB appears on the display Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease The display will show the bass or treble level If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob The
225. indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there s a problem with your vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Please follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your warning lights and gages They re a big help Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 20 seconds then it will flash for about 55 seconds If the driver s belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on 2 87 Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the air bag symbol The system checks the air bag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the air bag sensors the air bag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the air bag system see Air Bag in the Index This light will come on when you start your vehicle and it will flash for a few seconds Then the
226. ine label side up If you load a disc label side down the disc will not play and an error will occur Repeat this procedure for loading up to six discs in the magazine Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine slide the door to the right to open the compact disc changer for the front console mounted changer push the door to the right and it will open automatically Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of the arrow marked on the magazine Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left for the front console mounted changer push the door to the left and it will close automatically When the CD magazine is loaded the changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine This will continue for up to one and a half minutes depending on the number of discs loaded To eject the magazine from the player slide or push the door open then press EJECT Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the changer the CD changer symbol will appear on the radio display If the CD changer is checking the magazine for CDs the CD symbol will flash on the display until the changer is ready to play When a CD begins playing a disc and track number will be displayed The disc numbers are listed on the front of the magazine 3 67 If an error appears on the display see Compact Disc Messages later in this
227. ing a four wheel drive vehicle s transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P for an automatic transmission or if your vehicle is in gear for a manual transmission You or others could be injured Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL If your vehicle has four wheel drive it cannot be dolly towed A four wheel drive vehicle must be towed by flatbed Loading Your Vehicle GAWR FRT COLD TIRE PRESSURE The Certification Tire label is found on the driver s door edge above the door latch The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel cargo and trailer tongue weight if pulling a trailer 4 47 The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle If you do have a heavy load you should spread it out Similar a
228. ing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select AM FM1 or FM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer 5 Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons The sound will mute When it returns release the button Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return and the tone you selected will be automatically selected for that pushbutton 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone Bass Treble BASS Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass TREB Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them AUTO TONE This feature allows you to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for country western jazz talk pop rock and classical stations Each time you press the AUTO TONE button this feature will switch to one of these program types To return the bass and treble to the manual mode either press and release the AUTO TONE button until the display goes blank or press and release the BASS or TREB knobs and turn them until the display goes blank 3 17 Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL Balance P
229. ing the Learn or Smart button refer to your garage door opener owner s manual or contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com 2 Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person assist in programming the transmitter 2 80 3 Press the Learn or Smart button on the garage door opener motor head unit An indicator light will begin to flash when the motor head unit enters the training mode Following this step you have 30 seconds to start Step 3 4 Return to HomeLink in your vehicle and firmly press and release the programmed HomeLink button three times The rolling code garage door opener should now recognize HomeLink You may either use HomeLink or the hand held transmitter to open the garage door If after following these instructions you still have problems training the garage door opener contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com Canadian Programming Canadian Owners During programming the hand held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting after two seconds In this case you should press and hold the HomeLink button see Steps 2 and 3 under Programming the HomeLink Transmitter while you press and re press cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink is trained Operating the HomeLink Transmitter Press and hold the appropriate button on
230. inst the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there s no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you ll understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you re in a curve speed is the one factor you can control Suppose you re steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you ll want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway
231. intervals check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary A fluid loss could indicate a problem check and have it repaired if needed Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation More frequent lubrication may be required on off road use Brake System Inspection Inspect the complete system Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc Check parking brake adjustment You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking 7 51 Part D Recommended Fluids and USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Lubricants Hydraulic Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid Fluids and lubricants identified below by name Brake System GM Part No 12377967 or part number or specification may be obtained from equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid your dealer S Windshield GM Optikleen Washer USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Washer Solvent Solvent GM Part No 1051515 or equivalent Engine Oil Engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Hydraulic Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Clutch System GM Part No 12345347 or of the proper viscosity To equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid feces ar pias Parking Brake Chassis Lubricant GM Part y EN Cable Guides No 1
232. ion The RDS features of your radio rely on receiving specific RDS information from these stations These features will only work when the RDS information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station When you are tuned to an RDS station the station name will appear on the display instead of the frequency Most RDS stations provide their station name the time of day and a Program Type PTY for their current programming Some stations also provide the name of the current program Finding RDS Stations To find RDS stations perform the following steps 1 Press the SEEK TYPE button or turn the P TYPE LIST knob to display the program type list 2 Turn the knob either clockwise or counterclockwise to select a program type The list is alphabetical If you select ANY TYPE your radio will seek to the first PTY available 3 Press the SEEK TYPE button to activate search DISP Display Press this knob to change what appears on the display while using RDS Pressing this knob will also display an RDS station frequency or program type when the radio is on The display options are station name station frequency PTY and the name of the program if available Pressing and holding this knob will activate the RDS default display Finding a PTY Preset Station P TYPE LIST Program Type Turn this knob cloc
233. is right for your vehicle Here s how to decide which schedule to follow Scheduled Maintenance Short Trip City Definition Follow the Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance if any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle Most trips are less than 5 miles 8 km This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing Most trips include extensive idling such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle If the vehicle is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial application One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that these conditions cause engine oil to break down sooner Short Trip City Intervals Every 3 000 Miles 5 000 km Engine Oil and Filter Change or 3 months whichever occurs first Chassis Lubrication or 3 months whichever occurs first Drive Axle Service Every 6 000 Miles 10 000 km Tire Rotation Every 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection if driving in dusty conditions Automatic Transmission Service severe conditions only Every 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Engine Air Cleaner Filter Replacement Fuel Filter Replacement Every 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Automatic Transmission Service normal conditions Automatic Transfer Case Only Transfer Case Fluid Change Con
234. is button to listen to the radio when playing a tape TAPE AUX Auxiliary Press this button to play a tape when listening to the radio The lighted arrow will appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in the active mode EJECT Press this button to stop a tape when it is playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing Eject may be activated with the radio off Cassette tapes may be loaded with the radio and vehicle off if this button is pressed first Cassette Tape Messages CLN Clean If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index 3 19 CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player To activate the bypass feature use the following steps 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds indicating the feature is active 4 Insert the adapter into the cassette slot It will power up the radio and begin playing This override routine will remain active until the EJECT button is pressed 3 20 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player Bose If Equipped
235. is wearing a lap shoulder belt but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child s face or neck A Move the child toward the center of the vehicle but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide If the child is sitting in a rear outside position of a four door model see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides in the Index If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child s face or neck you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt if your vehicle has one 1 56 Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash 1 57 Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt isn t long enough to fasten your dealer will order you an extender It s free When you go in to order it take the heaviest coa
236. isplay Then press and hold the up arrow to increase treble T and a positive number will appear on the display Press and hold the down arrow to decrease treble T and a negative number will appear on the display T and a zero will appear on the display when the treble level is adjusted to the middle position Release the up or down arrow when you find the treble level you want or when the maximum or minimum level is reached If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble To adjust bass or treble to the middle position select BAS or TRE Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep B and a zero or T and a zero will appear on the display To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls to the middle position end out of audio mode by pressing the AUDIO button until the display goes blank Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep CEN will appear on the display Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade AUDIO To adjust the balance between the right and left speakers press and release AUDIO until BAL appears on the display Then press and hold the up arrow to move the sound to the right speakers or the down arrow to move the sound to the left speakers R and a number will appear on the display when the sound is balanced toward the right speakers L and a number will appear on the display when the sound is balanced toward the left speakers L and a zero wil
237. ittle when the engine and radiator are hot Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank but be careful not to spill it You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator For information on how to add coolant to the radiator see Cooling System in the Index 6 28 Radiator Pressure Cap NOTICE Your radiator cap is a 15 psi 105 kPa pressure type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck Power Steering Fluid The power steering reservoir is located near the front of the engine compartment on the driver s side of the vehicle 6 29 When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for reservoir location How to Check Power Steering Fluid Turn the key off let the engine compartment cool down wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean then unscrew the cap and wip
238. ity when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have an anti lock braking system you ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Anti Lock in the Index e Allow greater following distance on any slippery road Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit a spot that s covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can t reach around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you re actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers 4 41 If You re Caught in a Blizzard Tie ared cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you ve been stopped by the snow Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you have no blankets or extra clothing make body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe Turn on
239. ive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Don t take your vehicle through an automatic vehicle wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels Cleaning Tires To clean your tires use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner NOTICE When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle Petroleum based products may damage the paint finish and tires Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty 6 61 Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed
240. jor oil company that does business in the country where you ll be driving Filling Your Tank Gasoline vapor is highly flammable It burns violently and that can cause very bad injuries Don t smoke if you re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from gasoline The fuel cap is behind a hinged door on driver s side of your vehicle th While refueling hang the fuel cap by the tether from the hook on the filler door To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly to the left counterclockwise The fuel cap has a spring in it if you let go of the cap too soon it will spring back to the right If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it you could be badly burned Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill gasoline Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle in the Index When you put the fuel cap back on turn it to the right clockwise until you hear a clicking sound Make sure you fully install the cap The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atm
241. just bass midrange or treble to the middle position select BASS MID or TREB and push and hold the AUDIO knob The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display level to zero To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed The radio will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display AUTO EQ Automatic Equalization This feature allows you to choose preset bass midrange and treble equalization settings designed for country jazz talk pop rock and classical program types The program type last chosen will appear on the display when you first press AUTO EQ Each time you press this button another program type will appear on the display and AUTO EQ will switch to one of the preset program types To return to the manual mode CUSTOM press the AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the display Then you will be able to manually adjust the bass midrange and treble using the AUDIO knob 3 53 Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade AUDIO To adjust the balance between the right and left speakers push the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display Turn the knob to adjust the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on the display Turn the knob to adjust the sound
242. k No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up T I be careful isn t the right answer What if there s an emergency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts into the street A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision There s something else about drinking and driving that many people don t know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please don t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you re with a group designate a driver who will not drink Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you re driving on snow or ice it s easy to a
243. k into memory When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard immediately After two seconds of pressing SONG LIST continuously two beeps will sound to confirm that the track has been saved 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections If you attempt to save more than 20 selections S LIST FULL will appear on the display To play the song list press the SONG LIST button One beep will be heard and S LIST will appear on the display The recorded tracks will begin to play in the order that they were saved You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK SCAN arrows Seeking past the last saved track will return you to the first saved track To delete tracks from the song list perform the following steps 1 Turn the disc player on 2 Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on S LIST will appear on the display 3 Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired track to be deleted 4 Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two seconds When pressing SONG LIST one beep will be heard immediately After two seconds of pressing the SONG LIST button continuously two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has been deleted After a track has been deleted the remaining tracks are moved up the list When another track is added to the song list the tracks will be added to the end of the list To delete the entire song list perform the following steps 1 Turn the disc player on 2 Press the SO
244. kwise or counterclockwise to select the Program Type PTY you want to listen to TYPE and a PTY will appear on the display Press the SEEK TYPE button and the radio will seek to the first RDS broadcaster of the selected program type If the radio cannot find the desired program type NONE will appear on the display and the radio will return to the last station you were listening to AM FM Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type Press and hold AM FM for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on AF ON will appear on the display The radio may switch to stronger stations Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off AF OFF will appear on the display The radio will not switch to other stations When you turn the ignition off and then on again the alternate frequency feature will automatically be turned on SEEK TYPE Press this button to go to a station with the last selected PTY TYPE and the last selected PTY will appear on the display if it is not already showing Press TYPE a second time to seek If a station with the selected PTY is not found the radio will return to the original station and display NONE 3 33 RDS Messages ALERT Alert warns of national or local emergencies You will not be able to turn off alert announcements ALERT appears on the display when an alert announcement plays When an alert announcemen
245. l injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire 5 25 5 26 6 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off 8 Put the nuts on by hand Make sure the rounded end is toward the wheel Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off causing a serious accident 7 Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub If a nut can t be turned by hand use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as soon as possible 5 27 Use the wrench to tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown OO 9
246. l appear on the display when the sound is balanced between the speakers Release the up or down arrow when you find the speaker balance you want or when the maximum or minimum level is reached To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers press and release AUDIO until FAD appears on the display Then press and hold the up arrow to move the sound to the front speakers or the down arrow to move the sound to the rear speakers F and a number will appear on the display when the sound is balanced toward the front speakers R and a number will appear on the display when the sound is balanced toward the rear speakers F and a zero will appear on the display when the sound is balanced between the speakers Release the up or down arrow when you find the speaker balance you want or when the maximum or minimum level is reached 3 11 To adjust balance or fade to the middle position select BAL or FAD Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep L and a zero or F and a zero will appear on the display To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls to the middle position end out of audio mode by pressing the AUDIO button until the display goes blank Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep CEN will appear on the display Radio Messages CAL Calibrated Your audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory If CAL appears on the display it means t
247. l go It s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat outside position Wherever you install it be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Top Strap Some child restraints have a top strap or top tether It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision For it to work a top strap must be properly anchored to the vehicle Some top strap equipped child restraints are designed for use with or without the top strap being anchored Others require the top strap always to be anchored Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint If yours requires that the top strap be anchored don t use the restraint unless it is anchored properly If the child restraint does not have a top strap one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top strap and that the strap be anchored In the United States some child restraints also have a top strap If your child restraint has a top strap it should be anchored Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor points Be sure to use an anchor point located on
248. l include the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner s Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 Without Portfolio Owner s Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 Current and Past Model Order Forms Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time Visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at www helminc com For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery 8 12 Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds
249. laning doesn t happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just isn t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining Driving Through Deep Standing Water NOTICE If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through your engine s air intake and badly damage your engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you can t avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly 4 34 Driving Through Flowing Water Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces If you try to drive through flowing water as you might at a low water crossing your vehicle can be carried away As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle If this happens you and the other vehicle occupants could drown Don t ignore police warning signs and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass anoth
250. law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if the driver plans to drive It s a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration BAC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things The amount of alcohol consumed The drinker s body weight The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the American Medical Association a 180 Ib 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of a liquor like whiskey gin or vodka It s the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender difference too Women
251. light should go out This means the system is ready If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving your air bag system may not work properly Have your vehicle serviced right away 2 88 If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle it means the air bag system may not be working properly The air bags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle serviced right away if the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem Charging System Indicator Light The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition but the engine is not running as a check to show you it is working It should go out once the engine is running If it stays on or comes on while you are driving you may have a problem with the charging system It could indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt or another electrical problem Have it checked right away Driving while this light is on could drain your battery If you must drive a short distance with the light on be certain to turn off all your accessories such
252. ll posted regulations Avoid any driving practice that could damage the environment shrubs flowers trees grasses or disturb wildlife this includes wheel spinning breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground Always carry a litter bag make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving Take extreme care with open fires where permitted camp stoves and lanterns Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip especially when going to a remote area Know the terrain and plan your route You are much less likely to get bad surprises Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads It s also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle If something happens to one of them the other can help quickly Does your vehicle have a winch If so be sure to read the winch instructions In a remote area a winch can be handy if you get stuck But you ll want to know how to use it properly 4 17 Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It s a good idea to practice in an area that s safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness Off road driving does require some new and different driving skills Here s what we mean Tune your senses to differen
253. lt and you Il need longer braking distances It s best to use a low gear when you re in mud the deeper the mud the lower the gear In really deep mud the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don t get stuck When you drive on sand you ll sense a change in wheel traction But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is On loosely packed sand as on beaches or sand dunes your tires will tend to sink into the sand This has an effect on steering accelerating and braking You may want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly when driving on sand This will improve traction Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction On these surfaces it s very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if you do get moving poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control 4 28 Driving on frozen lakes ponds or rivers can be dangerous Underwater springs currents under the ice or sudden thaws can weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only Driving in Water Light rain causes no special off road driving problems But heavy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it If it s deep enough to cover your wheel h
254. lutch isn t pushed all the way down your vehicle needs service 7 47 Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a level surface 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake in the Index if necessary Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move 7 48 3 With the engine off turn the key to the RUN position but don t start the engine Without applying the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P your vehicle needs service Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position With an automatic transmission the key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK P With a manual transmission the key should turn to LOCK only when you press the key release button On all vehicles the key should come out only in LOCK Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission PARK P Mechanism Check When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of
255. may recognize it as a broken tape Use the following procedure to clean your remote cassette tape player 1 Turn the radio on 2 Insert the recommended cleaning cassette 3 Ifthe cleaning cassette ejects insert the cassette at least three times to ensure thorough cleaning 4 Eject the cleaning cassette if it does not eject on its own After you clean the remote cassette tape player press and hold the RECALL button on the radio until CLN appears on the radio display While still pressing the RECALL button press the EJECT button on the remote cassette tape player Release both buttons when the radio displays indicating that the CLN indicator has been reset 3 78 Care of Your Compact Discs Handle discs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust If the surface of a disc is soiled dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution and clean it wiping from the center to the edge Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge Care of Your Compact Disc Player The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged If the mast should ever b
256. mount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it s contacting your vehicle and don t spin your wheels Appearance Care Remember cleaning products can be hazardous Some are toxic Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle be sure to follow the manufacturer s warnings and instructions And always open your doors or windows when you re cleaning the inside Never use these to clean your vehicle Gasoline Benzene Naphtha Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone Paint Thinner e Turpentine Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous some more than others and they can all damage your vehicle too Don t use any of these unless this manual says you can In many uses these will damage your vehicle Alcohol Laundry Soap Bleach Reducing Agents Cleaning the Inside of Your
257. move the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the key your vehicle is in PARK P Hold in the button on the lever Push the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle 3 Turn the ignition key to LOCK 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the key your vehicle is in PARK P 2 42 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running Automatic Transmission Only It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set If you have four wheel drive your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL See Four Wheel Drive Automatic Transfer Case in the Index And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Don t leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you ve moved the shift lever into PARK P hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pulling it toward you or pressing the b
258. n Press this button to scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons P SCAN will appear on the display The radio will scan to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons play for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press this button again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning The channel number P1 through P6 will appear with the frequency The radio will scan preset stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while scanning Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select AM FM1 or FM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons The sound will mute When it returns release the pushbutton Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone Bass Treble BASS Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass TREB Treble Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them
259. n and off VOL Volume Turn this knob clockwise to increase volume Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume AUTO VOL Automatic Volume With automatic volume your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Press this button to select LOW MEDIUM or HIGH AVOL will appear on the display The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive Each higher volume setting allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Then as you drive automatic volume increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed NONE will appear on the display if the radio cannot determine the vehicle speed If you don t want to use automatic volume select OFF 3 42 Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display will show your selection lt q TUNE p Turn this knob to choose radio stations lt SEEK p Press the right or left arrow to seek to the next or previous station and stay there The radio will seek to stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while seeking lt q PSCAN p Preset Scan Press and hold one of the arrows for more than two seconds The radio will produce one beep The radio will scan to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons play for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press one of the arrows or one of the pushbuttons aga
260. n includes the following Turn and Lane Change Signals Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Flash to Pass Feature Windshield Wipers Windshield Washer Cruise Control If Equipped 2 48 Turn and Lane Change Signals The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change To signal a lane change just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash Hold it there until you complete your lane change The lever will return by itself when you release it As you signal a turn or a lane change if the arrows flash more quickly than normal a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won t see your turn signal If a bulb is burned out replace it to help avoid an accident If the arrows don t go on at all when you signal a turn check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index and for burned out bulbs If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for the trailer lamps a different turn signal flasher is used With this flasher installed the signal indicator will flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they are
261. n and complete a rental agreement and meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel Canadian Vehicles For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program Please consult your dealer for details General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontin
262. n error and will try to eject the disc several times before stopping Do not repeatedly press the CD eject side of the LOAD CD eject button to eject a disc after you have tried to push it in manually The receiver s 25 second eject timer will reset at each press of eject which will cause the receiver to not eject the disc until the 25 second time period has elapsed Once the player stops and the disc is ejected remove the disc After removing the disc press the PWR knob off and then on again This will clear the disc sensing feature and enable discs to be loaded into the player again lt REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release it to play the passage The display will show elapsed time FWD gt Forward Press and hold this button to advance quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release it to play the passage The display will show elapsed time RPT Repeat With repeat you can repeat one track or an entire disc To use repeat do the following To repeat the track you are listening to press and release the RPT button RPT will appear on the display Press RPT again to turn it off e To repeat the disc you are listening to press and hold the RPT button for two seconds RPT will appear on the display Press RPT again to turn if off RDM Random With random you can listen to the tracks in random rathe
263. n service work see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Maintenance Record in the Index You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work ona vehicle without knowing enough about it Besure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Fuel Gasoline Octane Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher If the octane is less than 87 you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive If it is bad enough it can damage your engine A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered normal This does not indicate a problem exists or that a higher octane fuel is necessary Gasoline Specifications It is recommended that gasoline me
264. n the ignition off and then on again the alternate frequency feature will automatically be turned on Setting PTY Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite PTYs These buttons have factory PTY presets You can set up to 12 PTYs six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Press AM FM to select FM1 or FM2 2 Press P TYPE to activate program type mode Turn the P TYPE knob to select a PTY Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the PTY you set will return Bo 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton 3 55 RDS Messages ALERT This type of announcement warns of national or local emergencies You will not be able to turn off alert announcements ALERT appears on the display when an alert announcement plays When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing If the compact disc player is playing play will stop for the announcement and resume when the announcement is finished INFO Information If the current station has a message INFO will appear on the display Press this button to see the message If the whole message does not appear on the display parts of the message will appear every three seconds until the message is completed To see the parts of the message faster than every three seconds press this
265. n this manual you ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly Safety Warnings and Symbols You will find a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people In the caution area we tell you what the hazard is Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you don t you or others could be hurt You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Don t Don t do this or Don t let this happen iii Vehicle Damage Warnings Also in this book you will find these notices NOTICE These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle In the notice area we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your warranty and it could be costly But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words You ll also see warning labels on your vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE iv Vehicle Symbols Your vehicle may be equipped with components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols used o
266. n until the correct minute appears The clock may be set with the ignition on or off To set the clock to the time of an FM station broadcasting Radio Data System RDS information press and hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time for two seconds until UPDATED and the clock symbol appears on the display If the time is not available from the station NO UPDAT will appear on the display instead RDS clock time is broadcast once a minute Once you have tuned to an RDS broadcast station it may take a few minutes for your clock time to update AM FM Stereo Fri EL biw Deae O E ea Tt m Nr ee el ee rermsbi et i Playing the Radio Power Turn the VOLUME knob clockwise to turn the system on and counterclockwise to turn the system off VOLUME Turn this knob clockwise to increase volume Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume RECALL Pressing this knob will display the station being played or it will display the clock Clock display is available with the ignition turned off Finding a Station AM FM Press this knob to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE Turn this knob to tune in radio stations lt SEEK D Press the right or left arrow to seek to the next or previous station and stay there lt SCAN D Press both SCAN arrows SCAN will appear on the display The radio will scan to the next station play for a few seconds then scan to the next station Press
267. n very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your dealer This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them If you go to your dealer for your service needs you ll know that GM trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle These schedules are for vehicles that carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on your vehicle s Certification Tire label See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits are driven off road in the recommended manner See Off Road Driving With Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle in the Index use the recommended fuel See Fuel in the Index Selecting the Right Schedule First you ll need to decide which of the two schedules
268. n your vehicle are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component gage or indicator reference the following topics in the Index Engine Compartment Overview Instrument Panel Comfort Controls Audio Systems Also see Warning Lights and Gages in the Index These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle CAUTION POSSIBLE INJURY PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING CAUSTIC BATTERY ACID COULD CAUSE BURNS AVOID SPARKS OR FLAMES SPARK OR FLAME COULD EXPLODE BATTERY LATCH BOTH LAP AND SHOULDER BELTS TO PROTECT OCCUPANT 4 DO NOT TWIST SAFETY Q BELT WHEN ATTACHING FASTEN SEAT AIR BAG N BELTS MOVE SEAT DO NOT INSTALL FULLY lt A REAR FACING cl REARWARD CHILD RESTRAINT SECURE 25 IN THIS SEATING CHILD SEAT POSITION PULL BELT OUT COMPLETELY a THEN SECURE y CHILD SEAT e DO NOT INSTALL A FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN THIS SEATING POSITION POWER DOOR LOCK winpow _ UNLOCK MASTER PARKING LAMPS HAZARD WARNING FLASHER DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS s 1 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM ENGINE OIL N e E7 ANTI LOCK BRAKES FUSE BOX ACCESS ENGINE COOLANT OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE SERVICE MANUAL gt
269. nd off Press the button again to turn the flashers off When the hazard warning flashers are on your turn signals won t work The flashers will stop if you step on the brake Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Jump Starting If your battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to the follow the steps below to do it safely Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you don t follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you NOTICE Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn t be covered by your warranty The ACDelco battery in your vehicle has a built in hydrometer Do not charge test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yellow Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won t work and it could damage your vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system NOTICE If the other system isn t a 12 volt system with a negative ground bo
270. ne oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first ooo i See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 22 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 69 000 Miles 115 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 72 000 Miles 120 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first
271. ne on a freeway as a passing lane 4 36 At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freeway adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it s slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your turn signal Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn t another vehicle in your blind spot Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable following distance Expect to move slightly slower at night When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are Before
272. needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 81 000 Miles 135 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 25 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 84 000 Miles 140 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 87 000 Miles 145 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check r
273. ng the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you re awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you re following a larger vehicle Also you won t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don t get too close Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone isn t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot 4 13 Check your mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror activate your right lane
274. ngine It will go away as the fan clutch disengages 5 18 If a Tire Goes Flat It s unusual for a tire to blow out while you re driving especially if you maintain your tires properly If air goes out of a tire it s much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you d use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your hazard warning flashers Changing a tire can cause an injury The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people You and they could be badly injured Find a level place to change your ti
275. ngine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away 5 10 Cooling System When you decide it s safe to lift the hood here s what you ll see A Coolant Recovery Tank B Radiator Pressure Cap C Engine Cooling Fan If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling don t do anything else until it cools down The vehicle should be parked on a level surface Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Don t touch them If you do you can be burned Don t run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle If there seems to be no leak start the engine again When the engine is cold the coolant level should be at The engine cooling fan Sp eed should increase when idle least up to the ADD mark If it isn t you may have a speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal oS i down If it doesn t your vehicle needs service Turn off leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses heater the engine hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the 8 cooling system 5 11 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant NOTICE Recovery Tank If you haven t found a problem yet but the coolant level isn t at the ADD mark add a 50 50 mix
276. no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you Climb a long hill on a hot day Stop after high speed driving Idle for long periods in traffic Tow atrailer See Driving on Grades in the Index If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 If you have an air conditioner and it s on turn it off 2 Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary 3 If you re in a traffic jam shift to NEUTRAL N otherwise shift to the highest gear while driving DRIVE D or THIRD 3 for automatic transmissions FIFTH 5 gear for manual transmissions If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning doesn t come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park your vehicle right away If there s still no sign of steam idle the engine for three minutes while you re parked push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you re parked If you still have the warning turn off the e
277. nt part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing and are subject to change If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was built or if you have any questions please contact your GM dealer Thermostat l l 0 0 0 0 cee eee 12559051 Oil Filter 2 Wheel Drive PF47 PF52 Optional Oil Filter 4 Wheel Drive PF52 Air Cleaner Filter 0 A1163C PCV VAaIVe eesicg duce adie siiu ae arte CV769C Automatic Transmission Filter Kit 24200796 Spark Plugs ps3 cceadebeaggetes ead ew ees 41 932 Buel Filtern 3053 coe nae ee eed enar ees we GF481 Front Windshield Wiper Blade Trico 20 inches 50 8 cm Backglass Wiper Blade Trico 14 inches 35 6 cm ACDelco Part No GM Part No 6 73 Section 7 Maintenance Schedule This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety dependability and emission control performance 7 2 Introduction 7 44 7 4 Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services 7 50 7 8 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 7 52 7 31 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 7 55 Part B Owner Checks and Services Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Part E Maintenance Record IMPORTANT KEEP ENGINE OIL AT THE PROPER LEVEL AND CHANGE AS RECOMMENDED Pro
278. nt where it stopped CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio When a disc is playing the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear on the display If the radio is turned off the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped EJECT Press this button to eject the disc from the player and play the radio When the same or a new disc is inserted the disc will start playing on track one If a compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than a few seconds the player will pull the CD back in The radio will continue playing When the ignition is off press this button to load a CD Compact Disc Messages ERR Error If the disc comes back out and this message appears on the display it could be for one of the following reasons You are driving on a very rough road The disc should play when the road gets smoother The disc is upside down It is dirty scratched or wet It is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again If it s very hot When the temperature returns to normal the disc should play Ifthe CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and Compact Disc Player with Radio Data System RDS and Automatic Tone Control If Equipped 3 41 Playing the Radio PWR Power Press this knob to turn the system o
279. nted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Appearance Care in the Index 6 34 Brake Wear Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won t work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque specifications Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets See Brake System Inspection in Section 7 of this manual under Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a
280. numbered memory button If there is a third driver use the seat adjuster switch to adjust the seat Pressing any of the seat adjuster switches the SET button or pressing the desired memory button twice will cause the seat to stop moving If you press the numbered button to adjust the seat and start the vehicle while the seat is still adjusting adjustment will pause while the ignition is in START Adjustment will resume after the ignition is in RUN Heated Front Seats If Equipped ey If your vehicle has this feature the controls are located on the outboard side of the seats This feature will quickly heat the lower cushion and lower back of the driver s and front passenger s seats for added comfort Press the lower part of the switch to turn the heater on low Press the upper part of the switch to turn the heater on high Put the switch in the center position to turn the heater off The passenger s safety belt must be engaged for the heated seat feature to work on the passenger s seat To adjust a manual seatback lift the lever on the outboard side of the seat Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it Pull up on the lever and without pushing on the seatback the seat will go to an upright position If your vehicle is equipped with the vertical power seat control described earlier it allows the seatback to recline also But don t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving Si
281. o a stronger station with the same program type Press and hold AM FM for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on AF ON will appear on the display The radio may switch to stronger stations Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off AF OFF will appear on the display The radio will not switch to other stations When you turn the ignition off and then on again the alternate frequency feature will automatically be turned on SEEK TYPE Press this button to go to a station with the last selected PTY TYPE and the last selected PTY will appear on the display if it is not already showing Press SEEK TYPE a second time to seek If a station with the selected PTY is not found the radio will return to the original station and display NONE 3 45 RDS Messages ALERT Alert warns of national or local emergencies You will not be able to turn off alert announcements ALERT appears on the display when an alert announcement plays When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing If the cassette tape or compact disc player is playing play will stop for the announcement and resume when the announcement is finished This function will only work during actual emergency broadcasts and will not work during tests of the emergency broadcast system This feature is not supported by all RDS stations INFO In
282. o about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control Press in the SET button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want then release it To slow down in very small amounts press the SET button briefly Each time you do this yov ll go about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier 2 54 Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you may want to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down Of course applying the brake takes you out of cruise control Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don t use cruise control on steep hills Ending Cruise Control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch pedal if you have a manual transmission Move the cruise switch to OFF Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition your cruise control set speed memory is erased Exterior Lamps O DOME OVERRIDE The contr
283. o fall back and strike the windshield To remove the old wiper blades lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical position 3 Remove the insert from the blade assembly The insert has two notches at one end that are locked by the bottom claws of the blade assembly At the notched end pull the insert from the blade assembly A Blade Assembly D Blade Pivot B Arm Assembly E Hook Slot E E o is thes D f To install the new wiper insert slide the insert D C Locking Tab F Arm Hook notched end last into the end with two blade claws A Slide the insert all the way through the blade claws at the opposite end B The plastic caps C will be forced off as the insert is fully inserted 2 Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from the wiper arm hook 6 43 5 Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom 6 Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm claws Make sure that all other claws are properly hook Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the locked on both sides of the insert slots hook slot 7 Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly onto the windshield Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement in this section for instructions on how to change the backglass wiper blade The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position like the windshield wiper blade so care should be
284. o federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 6 51 Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the
285. o reverse quickly through a track Release it to resume playing 5 Press this pushbutton to select a disc The disc number and track number will be displayed FWD 6 Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly through a track Release it to resume playing lt SEEK D Press the right SEEK arrow to go the next track on the CD Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the previous track on the CD The sound will mute while seeking AM FM Press this button to listen to the radio when a compact disc is playing CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button if you have a disc loaded in the changer and the radio is turned on to play a compact disc Press this button to switch between playing a compact disc and the console mounted CD changer if both are loaded 3 69 Compact Disc Changer Errors ERR Error If this message appears on the display it could be for one of the following reasons You are driving on a very rough road The disc should play when the road gets smoother A disc is upside down It is dirty scratched or wet It is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again The disc player is very hot The CD changer door is open Completely close the changer door to restore normal operation An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of the trays Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display If any error occurs repeatedly or if an
286. ock Clock display is available with the ignition turned off SCV Speed Compensated Volume With SCV your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Then as you drive SCV automatically increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use SCV turn the control all the way down 3 38 Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display will show your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it lt SEEK D Press the right or left arrow to seek to the next or previous station and stay there The radio will seek to stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while seeking To scan stations press and hold either SEEK arrow for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display The radio will scan to a station play for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning The radio will scan to stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while scanning P SCAN Preset Sca
287. ocks If you decide you can go down a hill safely then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down and use a low gear This way engine drag can help your brakes and they won t have to do all the work Descend slowly keeping your vehicle under control at all times 4 24 Q Are there some things I should not do when Q Am I likely to stall when going downhill ae 9 Cong h It s much more likely to happen going uphill But if A Yes These are important because if you it happens going downhill here s what to do ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident When driving downhill avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill A hill that s not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across You could roll over if you don t drive straight down Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL N or with the clutch pedal pressed down in a manual shift This is called free wheeling Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes Apply the parking brake Shift to PARK P or to neutral with the manual transmission and while still braking restart the engine Shift back to a low gear release the parking brake and drive straight down If the engine won t start get out and get help 4 25 Driving Across an Incline Sooner or later an off road trail will probably go acros
288. oints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 7 20 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions Inheavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 21 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 63 000 Miles 105 000 km a ooo Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 66 000 Miles 110 000 km Change engi
289. ol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the ADD mark start your vehicle If the overheat warning continues there s one more thing you can try You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it 5 13 Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 5 14 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap but now push down as you turn it Remove the pressure cap 1 You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops Don t press down while turning the pressure cap If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left 3 Fill the radiator with the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture up to the base of the filler neck See Engine Coolant in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mixture
290. ol on the driver s side of the instrument panel operates the exterior lamps The exterior lamps control has three positions 00 Parking Lamps Turning the exterior lamps control to this position turns on the parking lamps together with the following Parking Lamps Sidemarker Lamps Taillamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights w Headlamps Turning the exterior lamps control to this position turns on the headlamps together with the previously listed lamps and lights Off Turn the exterior lamps control all the way counterclockwise to turn off the lamps and put the system in automatic headlamp mode 2 55 Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside your automatic headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps and the instrument panel lights The radio lights will also be dim Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the top of the instrument panel under the radio speaker grill Be sure it is not covered or the system will be on whenever the ignition is on The system may also turn on your headlamps when driving through a parking garage heavy overcast weather or a tunnel This is normal There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead s
291. ompensation at faster vehicle speeds Then as you drive SCV automatically increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use SCV turn the control all the way down RECALL Pressing this button will display the station being played or it will display the clock Clock display is available with the ignition turned off Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display will show your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it lt SEEK D Press the right or left arrow to seek to the next station or previous station and stay there The radio will seek to stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while seeking To scan stations press and hold either SEEK arrow for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display The radio will scan to a station play for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning The radio will scan to stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while scanning P SCAN Preset Scan Press this button to scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons P SCAN will appear on the display The radio will scan to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons play
292. on Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States Please refer to the Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book or call 1 800 268 6800 for emergency services 8 7 Courtesy Transportation GMC has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for new vehicles The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required This will reduce your inconvenience during watranty repairs Plan Ahead When Possible When your vehicle requires warranty service you should contact your dealer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer requests that you
293. onal information See footnote 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Continued ee 7 37 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Continued Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service 7 38 Long Trip Highway S
294. oper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service 7 34 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 37 500 Miles 62 500 km Le Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Continued 735 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Continued Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly dri
295. or NOTICE Continued 4 50 NOTICE Continued important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle Additional rear axle maintenance is required for a vehicle used to tow a trailer See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section If yours was built with trailering options as many are it s ready for heavier trailers But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That s the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer e If you have an automatic transmission you can use THIRD 3 or as you need to a lower gear when towing a trailer Operating your vehicle in THIRD 3 when towing a trailer will minimize heat If you do here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll be d
296. orth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging your transmission see Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow in the Index NEUTRAL N In this position your engine doesn t connect with the wheels To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only 2 28 Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Don t shift out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing NOTICE Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine racing isn t covered by your warranty DRIVE D This position is for normal driving If you need more power for passing and you re Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push your accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down You ll shift down to the next gear and have more power DRIVE D should not be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving Select THIRD 3 when operating the vehicle under any of these conditions THIRD 3 This position is also used for normal driving because it offers more power and lower fuel economy than DRIVE D You should use THIRD 3 when towing a trailer carrying
297. osphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index NOTICE If you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index Filling a Portable Fuel Container Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others Dispense gasoline only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Don t smoke while pumping gasoline Checking Things Under the Hood Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine Hood Release To open the hood do the following 1 Pull the handle located inside
298. ot equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up See Safety Belt Reminder Light in the Index In most states and Canadian provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here s why They work You never know if you ll be in a crash If you do have a crash you don t know if it will be a bad one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn t survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot 1 11 When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Put someone on it Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it s just a seat on wheels Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider The person keeps going until stopped by something doesn t stop In a real vehicle it could be the windshield or the instrument panel 1 14 or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That s why safety belts make such good
299. otate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 7 32 Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions Inheavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 22 500 Miles 37 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months which
300. otation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE SERVICED BY ACTUAL MILEAGE DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 9 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 9 000 Miles 15 000 km a ooo Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 12 000 Miles 20 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first ooo i See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 10 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Change engine oil
301. our concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help contact the GMC Consumer Relations Manager by calling 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 Customer Assistance prompt In Canada contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting GMC please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied a
302. our vehicle has an automatic transmission the transmission must be in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If your vehicle has a manual transmission you must engage the parking brake 2 11 Panic Alarm Button When the panic button with the horn symbol on the key transmitter is pressed the horn will sound and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds This can be turned off by pressing the panic button again waiting for 30 seconds or starting the vehicle Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased through your dealer Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle any remaining transmitters must also be matched Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it 2 12 Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won t work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it s probably time to change the battery NOTICE When replacing the ba
303. ower Push this knob to turn the system on and off VOLUME Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume AUTO VOL Automatic Volume Your system has a feature called automatic volume With this feature your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Press this button to select MIN MED or MAX Each higher choice allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Then as you drive automatic volume increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use automatic volume select OFF RCL Recall Push this knob to display the station being played or to display the clock Pushing this knob with the ignition off will display the clock 3 52 Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE Turn this knob to select radio stations K SEEK gt Press the right or left arrow to go to the next or previous station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking K SCAN gt Press and hold either SCAN arrow for two seconds until SC appears on the display and you hear a beep The radio will go to a station play for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning If you press SCAN
304. owever the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources that the front seat passengers are not listening to For example rear seat passengers may listen to a cassette tape through headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones Be aware that the front seat audio controls always have priority over the RSA controls If the front seat passengers switch the source for the main radio to a remote source the RSA will play the same remote source The rear speakers will be muted when the RSA power is turned on You may operate the RSA functions even when the main radio is off The following function is controlled by the knob on the main radio PWR Power Push this knob twice to turn RSA off The following functions are controlled by the RSA system buttons PWR Power Press this button to turn RSA on or off VOL Volume Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume and counterclockwise to decrease volume Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it The left knob controls the left headphone and the right knob controls the right headphone lt SEEK D While listening to AM FM press the right or left arrow to seek to the next or previous station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking The SEEK button is inactive if the AM FM mode on the front
305. partway into the slot label side up The player will pull the disc in When a disc is inserted the CD symbol will be displayed If you select an equalization setting for your disc it will be activated each time you play a disc If the radio is on or off the disc will begin to play automatically To insert multiple discs do the following 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD button for two seconds You will hear a beep and the light located to the right of the slot will begin to flash 3 Once the light stops flashing and turns green load a disc Insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull the disc in Once the disc is loaded the light will begin flashing again Once the light stops flashing and turns green you can load another disc The disc player takes up to six discs Do not try to load more than six To load more than one disc but less than six complete Steps 1 through 3 When you have finished loading discs with the radio on or off press the LOAD side of the LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded When a disc is inserted the CD symbol will be displayed If more than one disc has been loaded a number for each disc will be displayed If you select an equalization setting for your disc it will be activated each time you play a disc If the radio is on or off the last disc loaded will beg
306. per cables from both vehicles If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed See Roadside Assistance in the Index If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing in the Index Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle s instrument panel See Gages in the Index Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool NOTICE If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with
307. ping slide the control to HI To turn the wiper off slide the control to OFF To wash the window press the wash button located on the control The control must be in either LO or HI The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as the windshield washer However the rear window washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer If you can wash your windshield but not your rear window check your fluid level 2 51 Cruise Control If Equipped With cruise control you can maintain a speed of about PANGE 25 mph 40 km h or more or uae ia without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can l really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h ow If you have an automatic transmission and you apply your brakes the cruise control will shut off If you have a manual transmission and you apply your brakes or push the clutch pedal the cruise control will shut off 2 52 Cruise control can be dangerous where you can t drive safely at a steady speed So don t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning and you could lose control Don t use cruise control on slippery roads Setting Cruise Control If you leave your cruise control switch on when you re not using cruise you might hit a button
308. played in minutes and seconds The track number will also appear when a new track begins to play Press this button again to return to the time display AM FM Press this button to listen to the radio when playing a CD The CD symbol will still display but the word CD will be replaced with either AM FM1 or FM2 If the radio is turned off the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio When a disc is playing the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear on the display If the radio is turned off the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped EJECT Press this button to eject the disc from the player and play the radio When the same or a new disc is inserted the disc will start playing on track one If a compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than a few seconds the player will pull the CD back in The radio will continue playing When the ignition is off press this button to load a CD 3 28 Compact Disc Messages ERR Error If this message appears and the disc comes out it could be for one of the following reasons If you re driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smooth the disc should play If it s very hot When the temperature returns to normal the disc should play The disc is upside down It is dirty scratched or wet
309. ppearing vehicles may have different GVWRs and payloads Please note your vehicle s Certification Tire label or consult your dealer for additional details Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or either the maximum front or rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle 4 48 Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way NOTICE Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they Il keep going Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Don t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Don t leave a seat folded down unless you need to There s also impo
310. pushbutton the station you set will return and the bass and treble equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone Bass Treble AUDIO Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS or TREB appears on the display Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease The display will show the bass or treble level If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble To adjust bass and treble to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the middle position To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed You will hear one beep and the radio will display ALL The bass and treble will be adjusted to the middle position AUTO TONE This feature allows you to choose preset bass and treble equalization settings designed for country western jazz talk pop rock and classical stations Each time you press the AUTO TONE button this feature will switch to one of these program types To return the bass and treble to the manual mode push and release the AUDIO knob until the display goes blank Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade AUDIO To adjust the balance between the right and left speakers push and release the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on
311. r Manual transmission fluid doesn t require change Automatic Transfer Case Only Change transfer case fluid Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV valve An Emission Control Service 7 42 Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use MILEAGE Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test PF the cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service SERVICED BY 7 43 Part B Owner Checks and Services Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Part D At Each Fuel Fill It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil in the Ind
312. r Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you will need to spin the wheels but you don t want to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you re stuck but you must use caution If you let your tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured And the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage When you re stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Don t spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer NOTICE Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth you can destroy your transmission For information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains in the Index 5 35 Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First turn your steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around your front wheels If you have a four wheel drive vehicle shift into 4HI Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear or with a manual transmission between FIRST 1 or SECOND 2 and REVERSE R spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear By slowly spinning your wheels in the
313. r additional information on accessory power outlets NOTICE NOTICE Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle can damage it or keep other things from working Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered as they should This wouldn t be covered by your by your warranty warranty Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment and never use anything that exceeds the amperage rating 2 76 Sunroof If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding sunroof To open or close your sunroof the ignition needs to be in RUN or ACCESSORY or Retained Accessory Power RAP needs to be active See Retained Accessory Power in the Index Press and release the rear side of the switch in the mini console to open the sunroof You can press the forward side of the switch to close the sunroof Once the sunroof is closed press the forward side of the switch to open the sunroof to the vent position The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which you can pull forward to block sun rays 2 77 Mini Overhead Console Full Size Overhead Console This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interferenc
314. r missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage tears or leakage Replace seals if necessary 7 50 Exhaust System Inspection Inspect the complete exhaust system Inspect the body near the exhaust system Look for broken damaged missing or out of position parts as well as open seams holes loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle See Engine Exhaust in the Index Fuel System Inspection Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks Engine Cooling System Inspection Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace as needed Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year Throttle System Inspection Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding and for damaged or missing parts Replace parts as needed Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables Transfer Case and Front Axle Four Wheel Drive Inspection Every 12 months or at engine oil change
315. r mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 41 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 97 500 Miles 162 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Inspect spark plug wires An Emission Control Service Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filte
316. r proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 27 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 93 000 Miles 155 000 km a ooo Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 96 000 Miles 160 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first ooo i See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 28 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 99 000 Miles 165 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axl
317. r than sequential order on one disc or on all of the discs To use random do one of the following To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in random order press and hold RDM for more than two seconds You will hear a beep and RANDOM ONE will appear on the display Press RDM again to turn if off Press and release the RDM button to play the tracks on all of the discs that are loaded in random order RANDOM ALL will appear on the display Press RDM to turn it off AUTO EQ Automatic Equalization Press AUTO EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting while playing a compact disc The equalization will be automatically set whenever you play a compact disc See AUTO EQ listed previously for more information K SEEK gt To seek press the left arrow while playing aCD to go to the start of the current track if more than ten seconds have passed Press the right arrow to go to the next track If you press the button more than once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the disc K SCAN gt To scan one disc press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep Use this feature to listen to each track of the currently selected disc for ten seconds The sound will mute while scanning SCAN will appear on the display Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning To scan all loaded discs press and hold either SCAN arro
318. r wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking brake and then shift into PARK P or REVERSE R for a manual transmission If you have a four wheel drive vehicle with an automatic transfer case be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL Release the regular brakes It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground use the steps that follow Always put the shift lever fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set If the transfer case on four wheel drive vehicles is in NEUTRAL your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL See Four Wheel Drive Automatic Transfer Case in the Index 4 61 When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you start your engine shift into a gear and release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and hav
319. radio is in use While listening to a cassette tape press the right arrow to hear the next selection on the tape Press the left arrow to go back to the previous selection The SEEK button is inactive if the tape mode on the front radio is in use While listening to a CD press the right arrow to hear the next track on the CD Press the left arrow to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played The SEEK button is inactive if the CD mode if equipped on the front radio or the CD changer is in use To scan stations press and hold either SEEK arrow until the radio goes into SCAN mode The radio will go to a station play for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning The SCAN function is inactive if the AM FM mode on the front radio is in use AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 If the front passengers are already listening to AM FM the RSA controller will not switch between the bands and cannot change the frequency Press AM FM to return to listening to the radio when a cassette tape or CD is playing The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening 3 63 P SET PROG Preset Program The front passengers must be listening to something different for each of these functions to work Press this button to scan through the preset radio stations set on the pushbuttons on the main radio
320. re To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly 2 Put an automatic transmission shift lever in PARK P or shift a manual transmission to FIRST 1 or REVERSE R If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL CAUTION Continued 4 Turn off the engine 5 Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle at the opposite end aeea i The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire 5 19 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The jacking equipment you ll need is stored along the driver s side inner rear quarter panel In some cases you may have to remove the spare tire in order to reach the jack Your vehicle is also equipped with work gloves and a plastic ground mat to assist in the changing of a flat tire The following instructions explain how to remove the spare tire depending on where it is mounted on your vehicle See Spare Tire or Compact Spare Tire later in this section for more information about the spare 1 To remove your jack cover pull up on the latch es on the cover Remove the wheel blocks jack and wheel wrench 5 20 NOTICE Never remove or restow a tire from to a stowage position under the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by a jack Alwa
321. re and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 6 26 NOTICE If you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost wouldn t be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system NOTICE If you use the proper coolant you don t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system These can be harmful Checking Coolant The coolant recovery tank is located in the engine compartment near the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at ADD or a little higher When your engine is warm the level should be up to FULL HOT or a little higher 6 27 Adding Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly With the coolant recovery tank you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a l
322. re listening amp EJT Eject Press this button to stop a CD when it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio off CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first Compact Disc Messages If the disc comes out it could be for one of the following reasons If you re driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smooth the disc should play Ifit s very hot When the temperature returns to normal the disc should play The disc is upside down It is dirty scratched or wet The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again Ifthe CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected contact your dealer AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player Bose If Equipped mite mr pre Included with this audio system are six Bose speakers and a six channel Bose amplifier Please see your dealer for details 3 37 Playing the Radio PWR Power Press this knob to turn the system on and off VOL Volume Turn this knob clockwise to increase volume Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume The knob is capable of rotating continuously MUTE Press this button to silence the system Press it again to turn on the sound RECALL Press this button to display the station being played or to display the cl
323. re to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick NOTICE Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid 6 17 Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C Athigh speed for quite a while In heavy traffic especially in hot weather While pulling a trailer To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200 F 82 C to 93 C Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it s colder than 50 F 10 C drive the vehicle in THIRD 3 until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off but this is used only as a reference Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50 F 10 C or more If it s colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to idle the engine longer Should the fluid level be low during this cold check you must
324. res the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels It s all right to drive with your compact spare if you have one It was developed for use on your vehicle If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform t
325. ress this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player To load a cassette tape with the ignition off press EJECT or RECALL Then insert the cassette tape If the ignition is on but the radio is off the tape will begin playing 3 18 Once the tape is playing use the VOL AUTO TONE BAL FADE BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the display whenever a tape is being played Anytime a tape is inserted the top side is selected for play first The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is metal or CrO gt 9 and adjusts for best playback sound If an error appears on the display see Cassette Tape Messages later in this section 1 PREV Previous Press this pushbutton or the left SEEK arrow to sear
326. ride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However you may use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts Cleaning Aluminum Wheels If Equipped Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Don t use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abras
327. rikes something that will move or deform such as a parked car the threshold level will be higher The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts because inflation would not help the occupant In any particular crash no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near frontal impacts The air bag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain As always wear your safety belt See Off Road Driving in the Index for more tips on off road driving What makes an air bag inflate In an impact of sufficient severity the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator which inflates the air bag The inflator air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger How does an air bag restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Air bags distribute the force o
328. riving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh 3 500 Ibs 1 589 kg or less You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh buildup and extend the life of your transmission Tow in DRIVE D You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions If you have a manual transmission and you are towing a trailer it s better not to use the highest gear See Tow Haul Mode in the Index Three important considerations have to do with weight the weight of the trailer more than 3 500 Ibs 1 589 kg You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer don t drive over 50 mph 80 km h and don t make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads the weight of the trailer tongue and the weight on your vehicle s tires 4 51 Tow Haul Mode V6 Engine Automatic Transmission Equipped Models If Equipped The tow haul mode is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer The purpose of the tow haul mode is
329. rk together can help you understand how your vehicle handles and what you can do to avoid many types of crashes including a rollover crash Driver Behavior The single most important thing is this everyone in the vehicle including the driver should buckle up See Safety Belts in the Index In fact most serious injuries and fatalities to unbelted occupants can be reduced or prevented by the use of safety belts In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt In addition avoiding excessive speed sudden or abrupt turns and drunken or aggressive driving can help make trips safer and avoid the possibility of a crash especially a rollover crash This section provides many useful tips to help you drive more safely Driving Environment You can also help avoid a rollover or other type of crash by being prepared for driving in inclement weather at night or during other times where visibility or traction may be limited such as on curves slippery roads or hilly terrain Unfamiliar surroundings can also have hidden hazards To help you learn more about driving in different conditions this section contains information about city freeway and off road driving as well as other hints for driving in various weather conditions Vehicle Design According to the U S Department of Transportation utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
330. rks Street Tower C Ottawa Ontario K1A ON5 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope you ll notify us Please call us at 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 or write Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 In Canada please call us at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French Or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 8 11 SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc RETAIL SELL PRICE 120 00 Transmission Transaxle Transfer Case Unit Repair Manual This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifications for GM transmissions transaxles and transfer cases RETAIL SELL PRICE 50 00 Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle Owner s Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner s manual wil
331. rtant loading information for off road driving in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving in the Index Payload The payload capacity is shown on the Certification Tire label This is the maximum load capacity that your vehicle can carry Be sure to include the weight of the occupants as part of your load If you added any accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the factory remember to subtract the weight of these things from the payload Your dealer can help you with this Add On Equipment When you carry removable items you may need to put a limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment OTICE Your warranty doesn t cover parts or components that fail because of overloading 4 49 Towing a Trailer If you don t use the correct equipment and drive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle NOTICE Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this part and see your dealer f
332. s Rear Seat Accessory Power Outlets e Six disc CD Changer Cellular Phone if equipped For more information on these components please see the Index for that item You may have a convenience net in the rear of your vehicle to help keep small items like gloves and light clothing in place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts The net is not designed to retain these items during off road use The net is not for larger heavier items Attach the upper loops to the retainers on either side of the endgate opening the label should be in the upper If your vehicle has the center armrest compartment lift passenger side corner visible from the rear of vehicle the cover to expose the storage area which includes slots Attach the lower hooks to the rear cargo tie downs on for cassettes or compact discs and a coinholder the floor Cargo Cover If Equipped If your vehicle has a cargo cover you can use it to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle Grasp the handle and unroll the cover Latch the posts into the sockets on the inside trim panel on the passenger s side of the vehicle to secure it An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver You or others could be injured If you remove the cover always store it outside of the vehicle When you put it back always be sure that it is securely reattached 2 70 Cargo Tie Downs There are
333. s e tyd Floor This setting directs most of the air through the floor ducts and some air through the windshield defroster outlets e od Blend Airflow is divided equally between the floor ducts and the windshield defroster outlets YY Defrost This setting directs most air through the windshield defroster outlets and some through the floor ducts Air Conditioning On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This reduces the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down Then keep your windows closed for the air conditioner to work its best For quick cool down on very hot days use MAX A C with the temperature knob turned to the left This setting should be used to keep odors and or dust from entering the vehicle For normal cooling on hot days use A C with the temperature knob turned to the left On cool but sunny days use Bi Level A C to deliver warmer air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets When the air conditioner is on you may sometimes notice slight changes in your vehicle s engine speed and power This is normal because the system is designed to cycle the compressor on and off to keep the desired temperature Heating The heater works best if you keep your windows closed while using it On cold days use floor mode with the temperature knob turned clockwise Blend mode is useful in cool weather when you have fog or ice on the windshield or side windows
334. s the incline of a hill If this happens you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline Here are some things to consider e A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across When you go straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end But when you drive across an incline the much more narrow track width the distance between the left and right wheels may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over Also driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive across a hill Loose gravel muddy spots or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can hit something that will trip it a rock a rut etc and roll over 4 26 Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression your vehicle can tilt even more For reasons like these you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the trail goes across the incline doesn t mean you have to drive it The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over Driving across an incline that s
335. s door armrest Move the selector switch to the left or right to choose the driver s or passenger s mirror then use the arrows located on the four way control pad to move the mirror in the direction you want the mirror to go Convex Outside Mirror A convex mirror s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver s seat A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right or left lane you could hit a vehicle Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Electrochromic Outside Rearview Mirror If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature the driver s side outside mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you See Electrochromic Day Night Inside Rearview Mirror earlier in this section Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors If Equipped When you operate the rear window defogger a defogger also warms the heated outside rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice snow and condensation See Rear Window Defogger in the Index for more information Storage Compartments Glove Box To open your glove box lift the lever on the front of the glove box and lower the door The glove box should not be open while you are driving 2 63 Overhead Console If Equipped Reading Lamps Press the button near each lamp to turn the reading lamps on and off The overhead console in
336. s of tread remaining You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that can t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage 6 49 Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need look at the Certification Tire label The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec number on each tire s sidewall When you get new tires get ones with that same TPC Spec number That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance handling speed rating traction ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle If your tires have an all season tread design the TPC number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type bias bias belted or radial as your original tires 6 50 Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes or types radial and bias belted ti
337. se your vehicle has a right front passenger air A child in a rear facing child restraint can be bag always move the seat as far back as it will go seriously injured or killed if the right front before securing a forward facing child restraint See passenger s air bag inflates This is because the Seats in the Index back of the rear facing child restraint would be 2 Put the restraint on the seat very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a py 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder a rear facing child restraint in the rear seat portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how Although a rear seat is a safer place you can secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 152 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 54 6 To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be s
338. sense Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts and the Answers Q A 7 Won t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I m wearing a safety belt You could be whether you re wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you re upside down And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted If my vehicle has air bags why should I have to wear safety belts Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future But they are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts Even if you re in a vehicle that has air bags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That s true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions Q If Pm a good driver and I never drive far from A home why should I wear safety belts You may be an excellent driver but if you re in an accident even one that isn t your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driver doesn t protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h
339. shift your transmission into PARK P Wait until the 4HI indicator light remains illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear This will get you into 4HI but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore normal operation 2 35 Automatic Transfer Case If Equipped If your vehicle is equipped with the automatic transfer case the transfer case buttons are located to the right of the steering wheel on the instrument panel Use these buttons to shift into and out of four wheel drive You can choose among four driving settings 2 36 Recommended Transfer Case Settings Transfer Case Settings AUTO Driving Conditions 4wD 4LO Extreme Vehicle In Tow See Recreational Vehicle Towing in the Index for further information 2HI This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations Your front axle is not engaged in two wheel drive This setting also provides the best fuel economy AUTO 4WD This setting is ideal for use when road conditions are variable When driving your vehicle in AUTO 4WD the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s power is sent only to the rear wheels When the vehicle senses a loss of traction the system will automatically engage four wheel drive Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than 2HI 4HI Use 4HI when you need extra traction such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations This setting also engages
340. simply drop the vehicle off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait GMC helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs reimbursement up to 30 per day five days maximum may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus In addition should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to 10 per day five day maximum may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts Courtesy Rental Vehicle When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight warranty repairs your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained at actual cost up to a maximum of 30 00 per day supported by receipts This requires that you sig
341. sions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction This light should come on as a check to show you it is NOTICE working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light doesn t come on have it repaired This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after a while your emission controls may not work as well your fuel economy may not be as Light Flashing A misfire condition has been good and your engine may not run as smoothly detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and This could lead to costly repairs that may not be may damage the emission control system on your _ covered by your warranty vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle NOTICE Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel
342. sk more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That s perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That s reaction time Average reaction time is about 3 4 of a second But that s only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in 3 4 of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it s pavement or gravel the condition of the road wet dry icy tire tread the condition of your brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied 4 7 Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow reali
343. solenoid eight wire harness only Light Green Back up lamps Brown Taillamps and parking lamps Yellow Driver s side stoplamp and turn signal Dark Green Passenger s side stoplamp and turn signal White Ground wire Light Blue Auxiliary stoplamp Securely attach the harness to the trailer then tape or strap it to your vehicle s frame rail Be sure you leave it loose enough so the wiring doesn t bend or break but not so loose that it drags on the ground Store the harness in its original place Wrap the harness together and tie it neatly so it won t be damaged 4 63 Section 5 Problems on the Road Here you ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road 5 2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5 10 Cooling System 5 2 Other Warning Devices 5 18 Engine Fan Noise 5 3 Jump Starting 5 18 If a Tire Goes Flat 5 8 Towing Your Vehicle 5 19 Changing a Flat Tire 5 8 Engine Overheating 5 34 Spare Tire 5 35 If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow 5 1 Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others They also let police know you have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off The hazard warning flasher button is located on the top of the steering column Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in and even if the key isn t in Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on a
344. ss the right or left arrow to seek to the next or previous station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking To scan stations press and hold either SEEK arrow for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display The radio will scan to a station play for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning The radio will scan to stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while scanning P SCAN Preset Scan The preset scan button lets you scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons Select either the AM FM1 or FM2 mode and then press P SCAN It will scan through each station stored on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons Press P SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning and listen to a specific preset station PSCAN will light up on the display while in this mode If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in the radio display will show the channel number P1 through P6 for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station 3 21 Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select AM FM1 or FM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press an
345. st parts under your vehicle and ignite Don t park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and Have your vehicle fixed immediately 2 45 Running Your Engine While You re Parked Automatic Transmission It s better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle See the earlier Caution under Engine Exhaust Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the fan is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park ina garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Blizzard in the Index 2 46 It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you ve left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P If you have four wheel drive your vehicle will be free to roll ev
346. station while reversing the tape The tape direction arrow will blink while in reverse mode D0 5 Dolby Press this pushbutton to reduce cassette tape noise The double D symbol will appear on the display while the player is in this mode Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation FWD 6 Forward Press this pushbutton to rapidly forward the tape Press this pushbutton again to stop forwarding the tape The radio will play the last selected station while forwarding the tape The tape direction arrow will blink while in forward mode AM FM Press this button to listen to the radio when playing a tape or CD TAPE AUX Auxiliary Press this button to play a tape when listening to the radio When a tape is playing a lighted arrow will appear on the display and show the direction of play If the radio is turned off the tape stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped EJECT Press this button to stop a tape when it is playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing Eject may be activated with the radio off Cassette tapes may be loaded with the radio and vehicle off if this button is pressed first 3 23 Cassette Tape Messages CLN Clean If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes
347. stations provide their station name the time of day and a Program Type PTY for their current programming Finding a PTY Station P TYPE Program Type This button is used to turn on and off Program Type PTY selections PTY and the light next to the button will turn on The last selected PTY will appear on the display for five seconds Turn the P TYPE knob to select the PTY you want to listen to Press the SEEK arrows to find radio stations for the PTY you want to listen to The last PTY selected will be used for seek or scan modes If a station with the selected PTY is not found NONE FOUND will appear on the display If both P TYPE and TRAF are on the radio will search for stations with traffic announcements and the selected PTY To use the PTY interrupt feature press and hold the P TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY you want to interrupt on When you are listening to a compact disc the last selected RDS FM station will interrupt play if that selected program type format is broadcast AM FM Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type Press and hold AM FM for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on AF ON will appear on the display The radio may switch to stronger stations Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off AF OFF will appear on the display The radio will not switch to other stations When you tur
348. stic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your engine ever stops while you re driving brake normally but don t pump your brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If your engine stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Anti Lock Brake System ABS Your vehicle has anti lock brakes ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start your engine and begin to drive away your anti lock brake system will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on This is normal If there s a problem with the anti lock brake system this warning light will stay on See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light in the Index Let s say the road is wet and you re driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here s what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels The anti lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programme
349. t 2 22 Retained Accessory Power RAP Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory Power RAP feature which will allow certain features of your vehicle to continue to work for up to 20 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF Your radio power windows sunroof and overhead console will work when the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF these features will continue to work for up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened Starting Your Engine Automatic Transmission Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine won t start in any other position that s a safety feature To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only NOTICE Don t try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped Manual Transmission The gear selector should be in neutral and the parking brake engaged Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine Your vehicle won t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down that s a safety feature Starting Your V6 Engine 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm NOTICE Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
350. t The positions next to the windows have lap shoulder belts Here s how to wear one properly Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way it will lock If it does let it go back all the way and start again If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 33 aN 3252 apr Ps a F K A NN N MO P i So S es a PISS w yy K p g D aa 3 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt shoul
351. t Put them in a storage area or take them with you Parking Lots Even if you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle it s still best to lock it up and take your keys But what if you have to leave your ignition key What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle Put your valuables in a storage area like your glove box e If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system take the transmitter with you Lock all the doors except the driver s 2 17 Content Theft Deterrent If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a Content Theft Deterrent alarm system With this system the SECURITY light will flash as you open the door if your ignition is off SECURITY This light reminds you to activate the theft deterrent system Here s how to do it 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter The SECURITY light should come on and stay on 3 Close all doors The SECURITY light should go off after approximately 30 seconds The alarm is not armed until the SECURITY light goes off 2 18 If a door is opened without the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter the alarm will go off Your vehicle s headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for 110 seconds then will turn off to save the battery power Remember the theft deterrent system won t activate if you lock the doors with a key or use the man
352. t catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty Oil pressure may vary with engine speed outside temperature and oil viscosity but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or other problems causing low oil pressure Security Light This light will come on briefly when you turn the key toward START The light will stay on until the engine starts SECURITY If the light flashes the Passlock system has entered a tamper mode If the vehicle fails to start see Passlock in the Index If the light comes on continuously while driving and stays on there may be a problem with the Passlock system Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock and you should see your dealer Also see Content Theft Deterrent in the Index for additional information regarding the SECURITY light Service Four Wheel Drive Warning Light If Equipped This light should come on briefly when you turn on the ignition as a check to show you it is working SERVICE 4WD The SERVICE 4WD light comes on to indicate that there may be a problem with the drive system and service is required Malfunctions can be indicated by the system before any probl
353. t comes on the current radio station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing If the compact disc player is playing play will stop for the announcement and resume when the announcement is finished This function will only work during actual emergency broadcasts and will not work during tests of the emergency broadcast system This feature is not supported by all RDS stations INFO Information If the current station has a message the information symbol will appear on the display These text messages are from the RDS broadcaster to the listening public and may be general information such as artist and song title call in phone numbers etc Press this button to see the message If the whole message does not appear on the display parts of the message will appear every three seconds until the message is completed To scroll through the 3 34 message at your own speed press the INFO button again for less than one second A new group of words will appear on the display Once the complete message has been displayed the information symbol will disappear from the display until another new message is received The old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button until a new message is received or a different station is tuned to TRAF Traffic Press this button to receive traffic announcements If the current station does not broadcast traffic announcements the radio will seek to a station t
354. t front passenger s safety belt that says to replace the belt be sure to do so Then the new belt will be there to help protect you in a collision You would see this label on the belt near the door opening s curit doit tre remplac e si le v hicule a t dans une collision ou si les mots Remplacer la ceinture de securit appraissent Replace Remplacer Belt la ceinture If belts are cut or damaged replace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn t being used at the time of the collision If an air bag inflates you ll need to replace air bag system parts See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section 1 59 Section 2 Features and Controls Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle and information on starting shifting and braking Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly and what to do if you have a problem I NNNWNN PRR Re AANY bot rot WBODMNW OOD OOAIW NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN iS 2 41 Windows Keys Door Locks Keyless Entry System If Equipped Rear Window Theft Content Theft Deterrent If Equipped Passlock New Vehicle Break In Ignition Positions Starting Your Engine Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped Automatic
355. t be under the belt and the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into on top the slots of the guide 1 37 Center Rear Passenger Position 4 Door Models 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions earlier in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guides squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guides Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip and then slide the guide onto the clip Turn the guide and clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior body leaving only the loop of the elastic cord exposed 1 38 Lap Belt When you sit in the center rear seating position you have a lap safety belt which has a retractor 1 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it Position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 39 Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection
356. t kinds of signals Your eyes for example need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds With your arms hands feet and body you ll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce 4 18 Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed Here are some things to keep in mind At higher speeds you approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles you have less time to react you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles you ll need more distance for braking especially since you re on an unpaved surface When you re driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose control and crash So whether you re driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear Safety belts Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features Here are some things to consider Surface Conditions Off roading can take you over hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surfaces affects the steering acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways Depending upon the kind of surface
357. t over While the tape is playing use the VOL AUDIO and SEEK controls just as you do for the radio The display will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of the tape is playing If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is off first press EJT or DISP If an error appears on the display see Cassette Tape Messages later in this section 1 PREV Previous Press this pushbutton to go to the previous selection on the tape if the selection has been playing for less than three seconds If this pushbutton is pressed and the current selection has been playing for more than 13 seconds it will go to the beginning of the current selection If this pushbutton is pressed and the current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or the beginning of the current selection depending upon the position on the tape SEEK and a 1 will appear on the display while the cassette player is in the previous mode If this pushbutton is pressed additional times or held the radio will go to the displayed number of previous selections up to 9 SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for previous to work The sound will mute while seeking 3 47 2 NEXT Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the tape If you press the pushbutton more than once the player will continue moving forw
358. t reduced brightness when the following conditions are met The ignition is on the exterior lamp control is in OFF the sensor detects daytime light an automatic transmission is not in PARK P and the parking brake is released When the DRL are on only your headlamps will be on The taillamps sidemarker and other lamps won t be on The instrument panel won t be lit up either When it begins to get dark the headlamps will automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps The DRL system on some vehicles may turn off temporarily while the turn signals are activated To idle an automatic transmission vehicle with the DRL off put the transmission in PARK P To idle a manual transmission vehicle with the DRL off set the parking brake The DRL will stay off until you shift out of PARK P or release the parking brake The following does not apply to vehicles sold in Canada When necessary you may turn off the automatic headlamp system and the Daytime Running Lamps DRL feature by following the steps below 1 Turn the ignition to RUN 2 Press the DOME OVERRIDE button four times within six seconds After the fourth press of the button a chime will sound informing you that the system is off The system will revert back to the automatic on mode when the ignition is turned to OFF and then to RUN again 3 To return to the automatic mode push the DOME OVERRIDE button four times within six secon
359. t this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure in the Index Center Front Passenger Position 4 Door Models with Front Bench Seat Lap Belt If your vehicle has a front bench seat someone can sit in the center position When you sit in the center front seating position you have a lap safety belt which has no retractor To make the belt longer tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt 1 31 To make the belt shorter pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug Buckle position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 32 Rear Seat Passengers It s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who aren t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions Lap Shoulder Bel
360. t to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill If you don t shift down your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down They could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill Know how to go uphill You may want to shift down to a lower gear The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission and you can climb the hill better Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains Don t swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane As you go over the top of a hill be alert There could be something in your lane like a stalled car or an accident You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling rocks area or winding roads Be alert to these and take appropriate action 4 39 Winter Driving 4 40 Here are some tips for winter driving Have your vehicle in good shape for winter
361. t you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you The extender will be just for you and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose Don t let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit To wear it just attach it to the regular safety belt 1 58 Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash If you ve had a crash do you need new belts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new parts AN CAUTIONATTENTION To help avoid personal injury belt assembly must be replaced if this vehicle is in a crash or if Replace Belt appears below Pour aider viter les blessures la ceinture de If you ever see a label on the driver s or the righ
362. tch on the door panel once and then the unlock side once If your vehicle is not equipped with remote keyless entry you may not be able to utilize this option All doors lock All doors unlock Press the lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel once and then the unlock side twice this is the factory setting All doors lock None of the doors unlock Press the lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel once and then the unlock side three times No doors lock None of the doors unlock Press the lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel twice This turns off the automatic lock feature For more information see your dealer If your vehicle has an automatic transmission it will be programmed to have all the doors lock automatically when the shift lever is moved out of PARK P All the doors will unlock when the shift lever is moved back into PARK P On a manual transmission all doors will lock when the vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph 24 km h The doors will unlock when the key is removed from the ignition The following instructions detail how to program your door locks Choose one of the previous programming options before entering the programming mode To enter the program mode you need to do the Rear Door Security Lock If Equipped following With this feature you can lock the rear doors so they 1 Begin with the ignition in OFF Then pull the turn may not be opened from th
363. te tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected contact your dealer Playing a Compact Disc Insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing The display will show the CD symbol If you want to insert a compact disc with the ignition off first press DISP or EJT If an error appears on the display see Compact Disc Messages later in this section 1 PREV Previous Press this pushbutton to go to the previous track if the current track has been playing for less than eight seconds If this pushbutton is pressed and the current track has been playing for more than eight seconds it will go to the beginning of the current track TRACK and the track number will appear on the display If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once the player will continue moving back through the disc The sound will mute while seeking 2 NEXT Press this pushbutton to go to the next track TRACK and the track number will appear on the display If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once the player will continue moving forward through the disc The sound will mute while seeking 3 49 3 REV Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse
364. tection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details 7 2 Introduction Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance procedures are important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition please maintain your vehicle properly Maintenance Requirements Maintenance intervals checks inspections and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow recommended maintenance may not be covered by warranty How This Section is Organized This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services explains what to have done and how often Some of these services can be complex so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should let your dealer s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous
365. th vehicles can be damaged 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles aren t touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you don t want You wouldn t be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transmission in PARK P or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL N NOTICE If you leave your radio on it could be badly damaged The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or in the accessory power outlets Turn off the radio and all lamps that aren t needed This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries And it could save your radio Open the hoods and locate the batteries Find the positive and negative terminal locations on each vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location of the battery Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sur
366. the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed Raise the head restraint and route the top strap under it 1 47 Once you have the top strap anchored you ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself Tighten the top strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer s instructions say Anchor brackets for the rear outside seat positions are located on the floor in the cargo area of your vehicle 1 48 If your vehicle is equipped with the rear convenience system there will be plugs covering the anchor brackets To remove the plugs grasp the edges of the plugs and pull them out See Rear Convenience System in the Index for more information Don t use the rear set of tie down brackets near the liftgate endgate or the center tie down bracket near the rear seats Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and 3 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is as the instructions say positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 Put the restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or aroun
367. the RECALL knob or both SCAN arrows to stop scanning Setting Preset Stations The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 21 stations seven AM seven FM1 and seven FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select AM FM1 or FM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press SET SET will appear on the display 6 Press one of the four pushbuttons within five seconds Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return Repeat the steps for each pushbutton In addition to the four stations already set up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time and by performing the following steps 1 2 3 Tune in the desired station Press SET SET will appear on the display Press two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time within five seconds Whenever you press the same two pushbuttons the station you set will return Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons Setting the Tone Bass Treble BASS Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease bass TREB Treble Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL Balance Turn the control ring behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The m
368. the display Turn the knob clockwise to move the sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to move the sound to the left speakers To adjust the fade push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears on the display Turn the knob clockwise to move the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise to move the sound to the rear speakers 3 31 To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until you hear one beep The balance and fade will be adjusted to the middle position and the display will show the speaker balance To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed The radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the level display in the middle position Using RDS Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System RDS RDS is a system that receives data along with the audio of the FM station you are currently tuned to You can use RDS to display program information and to control your radio With RDS your radio can do the following Seek only to stations with the types of programs you want to listen to seek to stations with traffic announcements receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies and receive and display messages from radio stations 3 32 RDS features are only available on FM stations which broadcast RDS informat
369. the glass To open a power lock system from the outside insert the key into the lock button and turn it counterclockwise All the doors will then unlock If your vehicle is equipped with the keyless entry system your vehicle does not have a lock on the endgate It is equipped with a push button to release the glass You may also use the keyless entry system or the power door locks if equipped 2 14 When the doors are unlocked press the button to open the glass Reach inside the endgate to lift the handle and open the endgate The endgate can be opened without a key if the driver s door is unlocked The endgate glass will not release if the vehicle is in gear To lock a power lock system from the outside insert the key into the lock button and turn clockwise All doors will lock Remote Rear Glass Release The REAR HATCH button located to the right of the steering wheel on the instrument panel allows you to release the rear glass from inside the vehicle If your vehicle has an automatic transmission your shift lever must be in PARK P or NEUTRAL N for the release to work If you have a manual transmission you must apply your parking brake or have the ignition off before you can open the endgate glass 2 15 Emergency Release for Opening Endgate 1 Peel back or slit the carpet locally to expose the access hole in the trim panel 2 Use a thin object to reach through the access holes
370. thy for your skin and could even cause cancer Don t let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil ask your dealer a service station or a local recycling center for help 6 15 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 3 Insert a new air filter if needed 4 Reinstall the engine air cleaner filter cover Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the engine air cleaner filter See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Don t drive with it off and be careful working on the The engine air cleaner filter is located toward the front engine with the air cleaner filter off of the en
371. tinued 7 5 Scheduled Maintenance Short Trip City Intervals Every 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection Every 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark Plug Replacement Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV Valve Inspection Every 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Cooling System Service or every 60 months whichever occurs first These intervals only summarize maintenance services Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages 7 6 Long Trip Highway Definition Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the conditions from the Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance are true Do not use this schedule if the vehicle is used for trailer towing driven in a dusty area or used off paved roads Use the Short Trip City schedule for these conditions Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions will cause engine oil to break down slower Scheduled Maintenance Long Trip Highway Intervals Long Trip Highway Intervals Every 7 500 Miles 12 500 km Engine Oil and Filter Every 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Engine Accessory Change or every 12 months whichever occurs first Drive Belt Inspection Cas is eee or every 12 months whichever Every 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Spark Plug Wire occurs first Drive Axle Service Tire Rotation oa Inspection Spark Plug Replacement Positive Every 15 000 Miles 25 000 km
372. tion TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it 3 16 lt SEEK D Press the right or left arrow to seek to the next or previous station and stay there The radio will seek to stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while seeking To scan station press and hold SEEK for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display The radio will go to a station play for a few seconds and flash the station frequency then go on to the next station Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning The radio will scan to stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while scanning P SCAN Preset Scan Press this button and P SCAN will appear on the display The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons play for a few seconds and flash the station frequency then go on to the next preset station This feature will only scan the six presets that are in the selected band Press this button again or a pushbutton to stop scanning presets The channel number P1 P6 will appear momentarily just before the frequency is displayed The radio will scan preset stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while scanning Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 by perform
373. tioned properly and the right number of pegs in place you should only have to press the button slightly to operate the opener Adjust the position of the garage door opener and add or remove pegs as needed until the opener operates properly 2 66 Temperature and Compass Display The outside air temperature and the compass are displayed at the front of the overhead console The control buttons are located to the left of the display Turn the display on or off by pressing the ON OFF button Display the temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit English or Celsius metric by pressing the US MET button Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle the temperature indicated will be the last outside temperature recorded with the ignition on If the outside temperature is 37 F 3 C or lower when you turn on the ignition the word ICE will appear on the display This is a warning to the driver that road conditions may be icy and that appropriate precautions should be taken The compass is self calibrating so it does not need to be manually set However when your vehicle is new the compass may function erratically If it does CAL Calibration will appear on the display To correct the problem drive in a complete 360 degree circle three times and the compass will function normally Variance is the difference between magnetic north and geographic north In some areas the difference between the two can be great eno
374. to be calibrated You may also place the compass in a noncalibrated mode by pressing and holding the MODE and US MET buttons simultaneously while in the COMP TEMP mode After about 10 seconds the compass will display C and you can release the buttons Drive the vehicle in a complete 360 degree circle three times at a speed of less than 5 mph 8 km h and the compass will function normally Once the calibration is complete the display will return to a compass reading Variance is the difference between magnetic north and geographic north In some areas the difference between the two can be great enough to cause false compass readings If this happens follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location 1 Find your location on the zone map earlier in this section Record your zone number 2 Press and hold both the MODE and the US MET buttons in the COMP TEMP mode 3 After five seconds the compass will acknowledge the variation mode by displaying the current zone number When it does release both buttons 4 Press US MET until your zone number appears on the display 5 Press MODE to enter your zone number Your variance is now set and the display will return to the COMP TEMP mode TRIP Once in the TRIP mode pressing the MODE button will step you through the following TRIP functions e AVG ECON Average Economy The average fuel economy since the last reset is displayed INST ECON Instant
375. to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position select balance or fade and push and hold the AUDIO knob The radio will beep once and will adjust the display level to the middle position To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when tone or speaker controls are not displayed The radio will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display 3 54 Using RDS Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System RDS RDS mode gives you many useful new features With RDS the radio can do the following Seek only to stations with the types of programs you want to listen to seek to stations with traffic announcements receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies and receive and display messages from radio stations RDS features are only available for use on FM stations which broadcast RDS information The RDS features of your radio rely upon receiving specific RDS information from these stations These features will only work when the RDS information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station When you are tuned to an RDS station the station name will appear on the display instead of the frequency Most RDS
376. ton or press it more than once the disc will advance further Sound is muted in this mode 2 RDM Random Press this pushbutton to play the tracks on the disc in random order RANDOM will appear on the display Press this pushbutton again to return to normal play 3 NEXT Press this pushbutton to search for the next track If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once the disc will advance further The next track number will appear on the display Sound is muted in this mode REV 4 Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton to return rapidly to a favorite passage You will hear the disc play at high speed while you press this pushbutton This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired passage Release this pushbutton to resume playing FWD 6 Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to advance rapidly within a track You will hear the disc play at high speed while you press this pushbutton This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired passage Release this pushbutton to resume playing lt SEEK D The right arrow is the same as NEXT and a the left arrow is the same as PREV If the right or left arrow is held or pressed more than once the player will continue moving forward or backward through the disc 3 27 RECALL Press this button to see what track is playing Press it again within five seconds to see how long the CD has been playing that track Elapsed time is dis
377. too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any anti lock brake system ABS helps avoid only the braking skid Off Road Driving with Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle This off road guide is for vehicles that have four wheel drive Also see Anti Lock Brakes in the Index If your vehicle doesn t have four w
378. trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity If you re using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch the trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer 4 55 Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You ll find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver s door or see Tire Loading in the Index Then be sure you don t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue 4 56 Hitches It s important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you ll need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow If you ll be pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than 3 500 lbs 1 589 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This
379. transmission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions Or if you have a manual transmission and you are towing a trailer it s better not to use FIFTH 5 gear Just drive in FOURTH 4 gear or as you need to a lower gear See Tow Haul Mode in the Index When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the automatic transmission in PARK P or the manual transmission out of gear and the parking brake applied for a few minutes before turning the engine off If you do get the overheat warning see Engine Overheating in the Index Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here s how to do it 1 Apply your regular brakes but don t shift into PARK P yet or into gear for a manual transmission Then turn your wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill 2 Have someone place chocks under the traile
380. treet lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay 2 56 To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp system off set the parking brake while the ignition is off Then start your vehicle The automatic headlamp system will stay off until you release the parking brake As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamps when you need them You may be able to turn off your automatic headlamp system See Daytime Running Lamps DRL later in this section for more information Lamps On Reminder A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on the driver s door is opened and your ignition is in OFF LOCK or ACCESSORY To turn the chime off turn the control all the way to the left or turn the instrument panel brightness thumbwheel down to the fully dimmed position In the automatic mode the headlamps turn off once the ignition key is in OFF Daytime Running Lamps Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system will make your headlamps come on a
381. ttery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter do Rear Window the following It can be dangerous to drive with the rear window or endgate open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You can t see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the rear window or endgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the rear window or endgate Make sure all other windows are shut 1 Insert an object like a thin coin in the slot between oes fan on 19n nealing a toons the covers of the transmitter housing near the key system to its highest speed with the setting ring hole Remove the bottom by twisting the object on VENT and OUTSIDE AIR That will force outside air into your vehicle See Comfort Controls in the Index If you have air outlets on or under the 3 Align the covers and snap them together instrument panel open them all the way 4 Check the operation of the transmitter See Engine Exhaust in the Index 2 Remove and replace the battery with a three volt CR2032 or equivalent battery positive side up 2 13 Endgate Release To open a manual lock system from the outside insert the key into the lock and turn it counterclockwise to unlock
382. tting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts can t do their job when you re reclined like this The shoulder belt can t do its job because it won t be against your body Instead it will be in front of you In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt can t do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Head Restraints Head restraints are fixed on some models and adjustable on others Slide an adjustable head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash Seatback Latches The front seatbacks fold forward to let people get into the back seat or to access the storage area behind the seat To fold a front seatback forward move the lever located on the side of the seat rearward and pull the seatback forward 1 8 To return the seatback to the upright position push the seatback all the way back until the latch catches If the seatback was reclined before being folded forward it will return to the reclined position If the se
383. ture of clean without coolant isn t covered by your warranty drinkable water and DEX COOL engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank See Engine Coolant in the Index for more information Engine damage from running your engine NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 5 12 NOTICE In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glyc
384. turn off the windshield wipers LO Low Speed Turn the band away from you to LO and past the delay settings for steady wiping at low speed HI High Speed Turn the band away from you to HI and past the delay settings for wiping steady at high speed Delayed Wiping You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes Turn the band to choose the delay time The closer to LO the shorter the delay Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they re frozen to the windshield carefully loosen or thaw them If your blades do become worn or damaged get new blades or blade inserts Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers A circuit breaker will stop them until the motor cools Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload Windshield Washer There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction lever To spray washer fluid on the windshield push the paddle The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to your preset speed In freezing weather don t use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision Rear Window Washer Wiper This control is located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering wheel To turn the rear wiper on slide the control to either LO or HI For delayed wiping slide the control to LO For steady wi
385. ual door lock It activates only if you use a power door lock switch with the door open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off Here s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident If you don t want to activate the theft deterrent system the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote keyless entry transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm If you set off the alarm by accident unlock any door with the key You can also turn off the alarm by pressing UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter The alarm won t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way Testing the Alarm The alarm can be tested by following these steps 1 From inside the vehicle lower the driver s window and open the driver s door 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the SECURITY light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm If the alarm does not sound when it should but the vehicle s headlamps flash check to see if the horn works The horn fus
386. ual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system To purchase a service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected an air bag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellow connectors They are probably part of the air bag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The air bag system does not need regular maintenance 1 29 Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Q If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the front of my vehicle will it keep the air bags from working properly A As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle s basic structure isn t changed it s not likely to keep the air bags from working properly in a crash 1 30 Q A Is there anything I might add to the front of the vehicle that could keep the air bags from working properly Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system front end sheet metal or height they may keep the air bag system from working properly Also the air bag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the air bag sensors If you have any questions abou
387. ubs axles or exhaust pipe don t try it you probably won t get through Also water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts If the water isn t too deep then drive through it slowly At fast speeds water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get your tailpipe under water And as long as your tailpipe is under water you ll never be able to start your engine When you go through water remember that when your brakes get wet it may take you longer to stop Driving through rushing water can be dangerous Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it s only shallow water it can still wash away the ground from under your tires and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Don t drive through rushing water See Driving Through Water in the Index for more information on driving through water After Off Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody chassis or under the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust system for damage Also check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to o
388. ue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Warranty Information Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information 8 10 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in the Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should immediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited You may write to Transport Canada 330 Spa
389. ugh to cause false compass readings If this happens follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location Find your location on the zone map Record your zone number Press and hold both the ON OFF and the US MET buttons The display will go blank After five seconds VAR CAL Variance Calibration will appear on the display When it does release both buttons Press US MET until your zone number appears on the display Press ON OFF to enter your zone number Your variance is now set 2 67 Sunglasses Storage Compartment Front Storage Area If Equipped The console has a sunglasses storage compartment To open the compartment press the release button Then pull the compartment down Door Storage You will find a storage compartment on each of the front doors Four door models have storage pockets and cupholders on rear doors 2 68 If your vehicle has this console compartment squeeze the front lever while lifting the top to open it You can store cassettes and compact discs in the slots in front of the compartment There is also a lift out storage tray in the console Some models will have a console with pop out cup holders located on the front of the storage compartment If your vehicle has this console push in and release on the cup holder door The cupholders will pop out for use The console also contains the following components Rear Seat Audio Control
390. ur wheel drive vehicle must be towed by flatbed 4 45 Dolly Towing Two Wheel Drive Models Only Your vehicle should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground Your transmission has no provision for internal lubrication while being towed To properly tow your vehicle it should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground Towing with all four wheels on the ground should be avoided 4 46 In rare cases when it s unavoidable and your vehicle must be towed with all four wheels on the ground the propeller shaft to axle yoke orientation should be marked and the propeller shaft removed following the applicable service manual removal installation procedure See Service and Owner Publications in the Index Dust or dirt can enter the back of the transmission through the opening created by removing the propeller shaft if proper protection is not provided Also check the transmission fluid level before driving the vehicle Use the following steps to dolly tow your vehicle Put the front wheels on a dolly Put the vehicle in PARK P Set the parking brake and then remove the key Disconnect the propshaft as described above Clamp the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing Release the parking brake Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed for recreational vehicle towing Follow the instructions for the towing equipment Shift
391. ure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Older Children Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts A If possible an older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat In acrash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts If you have the choice a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide 1 55 Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt can t properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time Q What if a child
392. urther The next track number will appear on the display Sound is muted in this mode REV 4 Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton to return rapidly to a favorite passage You will hear the disc track play at high speed while you press this pushbutton This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired passage Release this pushbutton to resume playing FWD 6 Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to advance rapidly within a track You will hear the disc track play at high speed while you press this pushbutton This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired passage Release this pushbutton to resume playing lt SEEK D The right arrow is the same as NEXT and the left arrow is the same as PREV If the right or left arrow is held or pressed more than once the player will continue moving forward or backward through the CD 3 40 RECALL Press this button to see what track is playing Press it again within five seconds to see how long the CD has been playing that track Elapsed time is displayed in minutes and seconds The track number will also appear when a new track begins to play Press this button again to return to the time display AM FM Press this button to listen to the radio when playing a CD The CD symbol will still display but the word CD will be replaced with either AM FM1 or FM2 If the radio is turned off the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the poi
393. use undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment At times you may notice a decrease in range This is normal for any remote keyless entry system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again Check to determine if battery replacement or resynchronization is necessary See the instructions that follow If you re still having trouble see your dealer or a qualified technician for service Operation UNLOCK When you press UNLOCK the driver s door will unlock automatically the parking lamps will flash and the interior lamps will go on If you press UNLOCK again within three seconds the remaining doors will unlock the parking lamps will flash and the interior lamps will go on LOCK Press LOCK to lock all the doors Press LOCK again within three seconds and the horn will chirp REAR When you press the REAR button twice within three seconds to release the rear liftglass the parking lamps will flash and the interior lamps will go on If y
394. utton on a console shift lever If you can it means that the shift lever wasn t fully locked into PARK P Torque Lock Automatic Transmission If you are parking on a hill and you don t shift your transmission into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into PARK P in the Index When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of PARK P before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P 2 43 Shifting Out of PARK P Automatic Transmission Only Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to fully apply the regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN See Automatic Transmission Operation in the Index If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever push the shift lever all the way into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you want You must press the s
395. ve your oil changed for you be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle as shown in the following chart RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING SELECT THE LOWEST SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE HOT FOR THIS WEATHER SYMBOL SAE 10W 30 SAE 5W 30 PREFERRED COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED As in the chart shown previously SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle However you can use SAE 10W 30 if it s going to be 0 F 18 C or above These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 NOTICE Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle If you are in an area where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C consider using either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures 6 13 Engine Oil Additives Don t add anything to your oil The recommended oils with the starburst sym
396. vehicle with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear Pull the retainer through the wheel Put the chisel end of the wheel wrench on an angle through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle Continue turning the wheel wrench until the tire is secure and the cable is tight The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened PUSH amp PULL E gt AJ ROTATE TIRE y 5 Make sure the tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If the tire moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable 5 31 Follow this diagram for the inside mounted spare Follow this diagram for the rear mounted spare A Spare or Flat Tire A Wheel Carrier B Retainer B Spare or Flat Tire C Nut C Wheel Nut and Locking Nut Cylinder D Wheel Carrier E Hook 5 32 6 Reinstall the locking wheel nut using the wheel wrench Then push the lock case onto the lug nut until it stops The key does not have to be inserted into the lock Push the lock case to be sure it is secured The special lug nut and lock case is not intended to be used on any road wheel only on the spare wheel carrier Tighten the nuts on the wheel carrier to 22 to 32 lb ft 30 to 40 N m Make sure the tire and carrier are secure Driving with the tire or carrier unlatched could injure pedestrians or damage the vehicle
397. vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground and dolly towing towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly With the proper preparation and equipment many vehicles can be towed in these ways See Dinghy Towing and Dolly Towing following 4 43 Here are some important things to consider before you Dinghy Towing Two Wheel Drive do recreational vehicle towing Models Only What s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations How far will you tow Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow Do you have the proper towing equipment See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations Is your vehicle ready to be towed Just as you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip you II want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before Leaving on a Long Trip in the Index Your vehicle should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground Your transmission has no provision for internal lubrication while being towed To properly tow your vehicle it should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground Towin
398. ven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 50 000 Miles 83 000 km If you haven t used your vehicle under severe conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the MILEAGE SERVIC fluid and filter Manual transmission fluid doesn t require change o e E Automatic Transfer Case Only Change transfer case fluid 7 36 _ Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 52 500 Miles 87 500 km Le Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additi
399. ver in both city and rural driving You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task Anything that distracts from the driving task such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call reading or reaching for something on the floor makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do things like this or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy It s the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle Judgment Muscular Coordination Vision Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking 4 4 and driving In recent years about 16 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it s against the
400. w for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep Use this feature to listen to the first track for ten seconds for each disc loaded The sound will mute while scanning to the next track DISC SCAN will appear on the display Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning 3 59 P TYPE Program Type Press this knob to see how long the current track has been playing To change what is normally shown on the display track or elapsed time press the knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob until the display flashes AM FM Press this button to play the radio when a disc s is in the player Using Song List Mode The integrated six disc CD changer has a feature called song list This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections To save tracks into the song list feature perform the following steps 1 Turn the disc player on and load it with at least one disc See LOAD CD listed previously in this section for more information 2 Check to see that the disc changer is not in song list mode S LIST should not appear in the display If S LIST is present press the SONG LIST button to turn it off 3 60 3 Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right arrow button to locate the track that you want to save The track will begin to play 4 Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or more seconds to save the trac
401. washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it s very cold This allows for expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Don t use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage your washer system and paint 6 31 Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for the location of the reservoir There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out 6 32 of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won t work well or won t work at all So it isn t a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid won t correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system If you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only
402. whenever you leave it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle You can use the keyless entry system if your vehicle has this feature You can use your key to unlock your door from the outside You can use the power lock switch if equipped to lock or unlock the doors To manually lock a door from the inside slide the manual lever on your door down To manually unlock a door from the inside slide the lever on the door up You will see a colored area on the lever when the door is unlocked If your vehicle has power door locks the switches are located on the driver s and the passenger s front armrests Remove the ignition key and press LOCK to lock all the doors at once To unlock the doors press the raised area to the right of the key symbol On four door models use the manual door lock unlock lever on each rear door to lock or unlock those doors from the rear seating area Programmable Automatic Door Locks If Equipped If your vehicle has power door locks it will be equipped with an auto lock unlock feature which enables you to program your vehicle s power door locks The following is a list of the available programming options e All doors lock Only the driver s door unlocks Press the lock side of the power lock swi
403. will use less than 0 02 cubic inch 0 3 cc of fluid from your vehicle s master cylinder Otherwise both braking systems won t work well You could even lose your brakes If everything checks out this far then make the brake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends fluid to the rear brakes But don t use copper tubing for this If you do it will bend and finally break off Use steel brake tubing 4 57 Driving with a Trailer If you have a rear most window open and you pull a trailer with your vehicle carbon monoxide CO could come into your vehicle You can t see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness or death See Engine Exhaust in the Index To maximize your safety when towing a trailer Have your exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting on your trip Keep the rear most windows closed If exhaust does come into your vehicle through a window in the rear or another opening drive with your front main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed This will bring fresh outside air into your vehicle Do not use MAX A C or RECIRCULATION because it only recirculates the air inside your vehicle See Comfort Controls in the Index 4 58 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the
404. xico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle hand controls wheelchair scooter lifts etc This program can also provide you with free resource information such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers The program is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease See your dealer for more details or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details When calling from outside Canada please dial 1 905 644 3063 All TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 8 5 Roadside Assistance GMC s Roadside Assistance provides stranded owners with over the phone roadside repairs location of the nearest GMC dealer or the following special services Flat Tire Change Installation of spare tire will be covered at no charge customer is responsible for repair or replacement of tire Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the customer to get to the nearest service station up to 5 00 will be covered Jump Start No start situations which require a battery jump start will be covered
405. you are on you may experience slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer braking distances Surface Obstacles Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous A rock log hole rut or bump can startle you if you re not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Here are some things to consider Is the path ahead clear Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead Does the travel take you uphill or downhill There s more discussion of these subjects later Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you re not prepared When you drive over bumps rocks or other obstacles your wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you can t control the vehicle as well or at all Because you will be on an unpaved surface it s especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking In a way off road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways There are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what isn t Drinking and driving can be very
406. you are driving The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement i The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals pavement markings the edge of the road and even people walking It s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts 4 32 Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you can t try to slow down before you hit them Wet brakes can cause accidents They won t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you re going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road 4 33 Hydrop
407. your front axle to help drive your vehicle 4LO This setting also engages your front axle and delivers extra torque You may never need 4LO It sends maximum power to all four wheels You might choose 4LO if you are driving off road in deep sand deep mud deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P or if you have a manual transmission even if you are in gear You or someone else could be seriously injured Be sure to set the parking brake before shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL See Parking Brake in the Index NEUTRAL Shift the vehicle s transfer case to NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle See Recreational Vehicle Towing or Towing Your Vehicle in the Index for more information Indicator lights in the buttons show which setting you are in The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on If the lights do not come on you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service An indicator light will flash while shifting the transfer case It will remain illuminated when the shift is complete If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift it will return to the last chosen setting If the SERVICE 4WD light stays on you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service See Service 4WD in the Index for further inform
408. your hazard flashers You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful 4 42 Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You can t see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn t collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that s away from the wind This will help keep CO out Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
409. ys tighten the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle when restowing To remove the underbody mounted spare insert the chisel end of the wheel wrench on an angle into the hoist shaft hole in the rear bumper Be sure the chisel end of the wheel wrench connects into the hoist shaft 3 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire Keep turning the wheel wrench until the spare tire has been completely lowered Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening Pull the tire out from under the vehicle The locking wheel nut can be removed by snapping the rubber weather cover off the face of the lock case NOTICE To help avoid vehicle damage do not drive the vehicle before the cable is properly stored If you have an inside mounted spare tire the tire must be removed in order to have access to the jack storage To remove an inside mounted spare tire reach into your tire s cover and unscrew the wing nut at the center of the wheel Remove it and the retainer Unhook the tire from the mounting bracket and remove the cover To remove a rear mounted spare tire first make sure that the carrier arm is fully latched to the endgate Then remove the spare tire cover 5 21 Insert the key and pull the lock case straight off It is not necessary to turn the key Put the spare tire near the flat tire The tools you ll be using include the jack A
410. ystem Engine Control Module Injectors 6 69 Name A C W W PMP HORN BTSI B U LP IGN B RAP LD LEV OXYSEN IGNE MIR LKS FOG LP IGNA STUD 2 PARKLP 6 70 Usage Air Conditioning Not Used Horn Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Back Up Lamps Column Feed IGN 2 3 4 Retained Accessory Power Not Used Oxygen Sensor Engine Mirrors Door Locks Fog Lamps Starting and Charging IGN 1 Accessory Feeds Electric Brake Parking Lamps Name LR PRK IGN C HTDSEAT HVAC TRCHMSL RRDFOG TBC CRANK HAZLP VECHMSL HTDMIR ATC STOPLP RR W W Usage Left Rear Parking Lamps Starter Solenoid Fuel Pump PRNDL Heated Seat HVAC System Trailer Center High Mount Stop Light Rear Defogger Truck Body Computer Clutch Switch NSBU Switch Hazard Lamps Vehicle Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Heated Mirror Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Stop Lamps Rear Window Wiper Replacement Bulbs Lamps Number Halogen Headlamps 9006 HB4 or Composite Low Beam 9006LL Halogen Headlamps 9005 HB3 Composite High Beam Taillamps 3057 Front Sidemarker Lamps 194 NA Turn Signal Lamps 3457A For replacement bulbs not listed here please consult your dealer Capacities and Specifications Engine Description VORTEC 4300 Typis repre take bh nals one Rae Ae EE dos V6 VIN Code 25 5 hd ann bina hoehbacer a habeas WwW Firing Order 0004 1 6 5 4 3 2 Horsepower

2002 GMC Jimmy Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents